Home

Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS

1. 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 002 1 Network parameter setting QQ2HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 normal station DIFF DIFF 037 037 2 35 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 9 MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 Network 2 control station 2Mp3 Network range assignment of gateway stations refresh parameters For MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 that is gateway station change the settings by Performing B W refreshment by the setting of Refresh parameters For MELSECNET H network 2 control station 2Mp3 that is gateway station change the settings of MELSECNET II 3 tier master station by Assigning LB LW to each station by the setting of Network range assignment Common parameters 2 Assigning B W refreshment by the setting of Refresh parameters MELSECNET H network 1 MELSECNET H network 2 Normal station 1Ns1 CPU Control station 2Mp3 Common parameters LB LW LB LW 100 180 200 280 37F 1FFF quum Link refresh 51 Set not to duplicate B W the CPU 2 Perform the LB LW assignment for network 2 control station 2Mp3 including the same LB LW area as that of 1Mp3 to relay network 1 control station 1Mp3 2 36 2 REPL
2. MELSECNET 10 mode XN Max 2048 points and max number of I O MELSECNET H mode points of CPU module on master station extended mode 8192 points Maximum MELSECNET mode 1024 points MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points number of MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET H mode link points MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET H extended mode per network 4096 points 16384 points MELSECNET mode 1024 points MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points w MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET H extended mode 4096 points 16384 points MELSECNET 10 mode When the number of bytes MELSECNET mode 1024 bytes MELSECNET H mode exceeds 2000 mount two Maximum number MELSECNET II mode LY LB 8 2x LW lt 2000 modules having the same of link points per MELSECNET II composite mode bytes A network or set all station First half 1024 bytes MELSECNET H extended mode modules on the network in the Second half 1024 bytes LY LB 8 2 x LW 35840 MELSECNET H extended bytes mode Communication Sueca 1 25Mbps 10Mbps O Set the remote I O network Number of stati t t twork bond d ES 65 stations master station 1 32 stations control station 1 normal 2 local station remote station 64 station 31 A network configure a separate network When using existing cables
3. 2 3 2 2 1 Module performance comparisons 2 3 2 2 2 Cable performance comparisons 2 7 2 3 Functional Comparisons 2 10 2 4 Switch Settings 2 11 2 5 Parameter Comparisons ene 2 12 2 5 1 Parameter COMPARISONS eria ebrei oda Oe e EXTR 2 12 2 5 2 Example of changing parameters on 2 tier system 8 2 13 2 5 3 Example of changing parameters on 3 tier system When only the first half of link parameter is set 2 27 2 5 4 Example of changing parameters on 3 tier system When the first half second half of link parameter is 2 43 2 6 Program Comparisons 2 63 2 6 1 Comparison of special relays SB and special registers D SW 2 63 2 6 2 Transient instructions 2 2 70 27 Replacement Precautions 252 nee re eee 2 72 CHAPTER 3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET MELSECNET B REMOTE I O NETWORK 3 1to3 29 3 1 List of MELSECNET II MELSECNET B Alternative Models 3 1 3 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons
4. 5 46 5 6 2 X Comparison of dedicated instruction 5 48 5 7 Other Precautions 5 53 10 CHAPTER 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 EXISTING MELSECNET II WITHA GATEWAY STATION 6 1 06 15 6 1 Applicaton of Gateway Station Using Gateway Set 6 1 6 2 List of Gateway Set Models 222 2 40222214 2 1 4 6 3 6 3 Precautions for Use of Gateway 6 4 6 4 Communication Between Existing ACPU in MELSECNET II and Added QCPU Data Transmission Reception by Inter link Data 6 5 6 5 Communication Between Existing ACPU in MELSECNET II and Added QCPU Using Gateway Set Data Transmission Reception by Sequence eme 6 10 CHAPTER 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET II B AS THE LOCAL STATION 7 1to7 11 7 1 Application that Connects the QCPU as the Local Station 7 1 7 2 List of Local Station Data Link Module 2 7 3 7 3 Precautions for Using Local Station Data Link Module seen 7 3 7 4 Network Parameter Hee eie Di e ibas dics 7 4 CHAPTER8 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK 8 1t08 27 8 1 List of CC Link Alternative 8 1 8 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons
5. CPU Control station 1Mp3 to Station inherent parameter Common parameters BW LB LW LB LW 1 20 4Mp3 0 4 e gt a 1 100 100 L 4Mp3 4 l 480 2 Mp3 2 3 ines 20012391 2351 agg 2 52 agg 2 52 1 240 1 1Ns2 380 Ec 1Ns1 4380 l goo 52 m 1Mp3 e 1Mp3 K amp N b 4 2Mp3 iLi k 2Mp3 4 680 680 1852 1Ns2 le 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 Transit by station inherent parameter 2 49 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 QO6HCPU Network parameter QO6HCPU _ network 1 control station 1 3 00 ES E S S m LB LW settings 4 s H 0200 Di 0500 0500 Disable 0000 0000 O1FF 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Station inherent parameter QO6HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 Reference network range assig
6. _ E TT s ien iur Bel 0000 EN 0800 0800 Transfers Tansee A em 2 21 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 MELSECNET II composite mode The following shows the procedures for changing the parameters the case of a MELSECNET II composite mode 2 tier system configuration on an ASACPU MELSECNET II MELSECNET H Optical loop Optical loop A3ACPU QO6HCPU MELSECNET II mode compatible link modules are used for the M and L2 stations anda MELSECNET mode compatible u 9 link module is used for the L1 A2Acpu 889 Q02HCPU 0 100 200 300 400 500 FFF M L1 L2 M L2 Setting range of Setting range first half of link of second half of parameters link parameters gt MELSECNET H module set as normal station requires network parameter setting For replacement of MELSECNET 11 module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU newly set network parameters The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET H Common parameter Station inherent parameter Refresh parameter Network range assignment 1 1 m Refer to example in b 2 Refer to example in b 3 Refer to example in b 4 1Ns2 9 A Refer to example in c 2 Refer t
7. App 2 Appendix 2 2 5 series App 3 Appendix 2 3 QnA QnAS series eei SER naa FA SE URN SEED ERR se App 3 Appendix 2 4 series 3 12 For the products shown handbooks for transition catalogues and transition examples refer to the manuals for the relevant products and check the detailed specifications precautions for use and restrictions before replacement For the products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd and other companies refer to the catalogue for each product and check the detailed specifications precautions for use and restrictions before use The manuals and catalogues for our products products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd and Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd are shown in Appendix of each handbook for transition Products shown in this handbook are subject to change without notice 13 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this handbook uses the following generic terms and abbreviations Generic term abbreviation Description lt series Abbreviation for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A series programmable controllers 5 series Abbreviation
8. Transfer Transfers 74 7 PLC side Dev name Pone Sut Points Stat End sB 52 5 52 2 51 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC f MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 For MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 that is not gateway station change the settings of MELSECNET II 2 tier first half second half setting by Dividing the data into the first half LB LW and second half LB LW and transferring them by setting of Setting1 and Setting2 of Station inherent parameter MELSECNET H network 1 Normal station 1Ns2 tation inherent parameter Common parameters LB LW uuu zi 200 p n MV 1Ns1 1380 NS EON 500 m 6FF lt p Transit by station inherent parameter 2 52 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 Q02HCPU 1 Network parameter setting 02 MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Network type MNET H mode Normal station None None Starting 1 0 No 0000 Network No 1 Total stations Group No 0 Station No Mode On line X X ation inherent parameter Refresh parameters Interrupt
9. a ee 2 Network range assignment QO6HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 Setup common and Station inherent parameters Assignment method Points Start Monitoring time 201 x 10ms Parameter name Total slave 3 Start End latae 3 Switch screens Le LW settings 3 Refresh parameter QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 Assignment method Points Start Start End Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold Dev name Points Stat End Points Stat End iB 512 orre sa 52 0000 52 Random cyclic qJ Radomcydic mE gt 002 ei a SS SSS 2 1 Transfers Transte5 7 SJ J Transtes A 16 2 33 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC f MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 For MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 that is not gateway station change the settings by Performing B W refreshment by the setting of Refresh parameters MELSECNET H network 1 Normal station 1Ns2 Common parameters LB LW Link i refresh
10. 200 200 See l 280 27F l f l l 1 f 37F l l l 1 f l l 1FFF i 1FFF 5 Inter link data transfer from module 1 to 2 Inter link data transfer from module 2 to 1 2 39 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 40 The following describes the inter link data transfer setting of MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 QOGHCPU 1 Inter link data transfer parameter MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 dou Transfer from Module T MNET7H mode Normal station Ponte Stat StauEnd trensterto Modus MNETZH mode Control station jsuis pand c Transfer from Module2 MNET H mode Control station Transfer to Module1 MNET H mode Normal station 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC i MELSECNET H network 2 normal station 2Ns1 2Ns2 For MELSECNET H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1 and 2Ns2 change the settings by Performing B W refreshment by the setting of Refresh parameters MELSECNET H network 2 Normal st
11. 4 4 a a 4 4 Transtes w 18 28 0200 w 18 v 18 50 Transfer w 18 0 v 18 00 Transfers 18 0280 O2FF e w gt 18 0500 w 18 gt 18 090 Transeri w 18 gt 18 0580 few 4 18 0 4 1804 000 Transeri2 w 18 18 50 A doo 8 2 58 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 5 Inter link data transfer parameter QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 iif 8 8 mof 0280 030 037 oof FF NF 0200 ERE i e 2 59 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC h MELSECNET H network 2 normal station 2Ns1 2Ns2 For MELSECNET H network 2 normal station 2Ns1 2Ns2 that is not gateway station change the settings of MELSECNET II 2 tier first half second half setting by Dividing the data into the first half LB LW and second half LB LW and transferring them by the setting of Setting1 and Setting2 of Station inherent parameter MELSECNET H network 2 Normal station 2Ns1 2Ns2 Station inherent parameter Common parameters LB LW LB LW Link refresh lt lt gt Transi
12. Coaxial loop MELSECNET H Coaxial bus 1 Network 1 1R1 1R3 MELSECNET H Coaxial bus 1MR Network 1 System configuration precautions There are no extra items in addition to the common precautions on the previous page System configuration precautions The following item is provided in addition to common precautions 1 the previous page Overall distance If this value exceeds the Q series specification value when the MELSECNET 10 system cables are re used measures e g adding a repeater unit are required Number of stations When 64 modules are connected measures e g dividing into two or three networks of 32 modules or less having a different network No are required Duplex loop When the transmission path has to be duplexed changes to an optical loop system etc are required 1 INTRODUCTION 1 3 Replacing the CC Link for A AnS QnA QnAS Series with the CC Link for Q Series When using the A AnS QnA QnAS series CC Link system master local module replace it with the QJ61BT11N CC Link system master local module Currently used CC Link dedicated cables remote stations remote device stations and intelligent device stations can be used excluding some models For details on models that cannot be used check Section 8 7 Other Precautions 1 29 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC R
13. Memes Saon Network Na an Total statens LLL Networkrangeassinment tel Necessary setting Mo setting Already set Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Start 1 0 No dalasa o me Input the start 1 0 No installed in the module 16 point unit 00000 Acknowledge assignment Routing parameter Check End Cancel Network range assignment LB LW settings A3ACPU MELSECNET master station Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End reca Switch screens settings Send range for each station Send range for each station M station gt station M station lt station 2 ee eee ae ee LW pe No Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End De 000 256 0000 T Monitoring time 201 X 1 ms 1 256 1 18 0200 02 ER 20 b Gateway station Q2ASCPU L3 1Mp1 The following shows the network parameter settings of the gateway station Q2ASCPU L3 1Mp1 Network parameter settings Q2ASCPU L3 1Mp1 Necessary settingl setting Already set Setifitisneeded No setting Alreadyset Start 1 0 No Valid module nh m Intern transmission parameters Inputthe start 1 0 No installed in the module in 16 point un
14. 2 Refresh parameters 2902 MELSECNET H normal station Assignment method Points Start Start End 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 MELSECNET II mode The following shows the procedure for changing the parameters in the case of a MELSECNET II mode 2 tier system configuration MELSECNET 1 MELSECNET H Optical loop QO6HCPU A2ACPU Optical loop Q02HCPU B WO 100 200 300 400 800 900 A00 B00 FFF M L1 L2 M L1 12 Setting range of first Setting range of second half of link parameters half of link parameters Each of the MELSECNET II first and second half settings correspond to Setting1 and Setting2 set to all stations according to the Station inherent parameters on MELSECNET H Example Station inherent parameters of a normal station 1Ns2 CPU MELSECNET H normal station 1Ns2 pO Station inherent parameters Common parameters LB LW LB LW i 000 to 1MP1 7 FE 400 titi 1 1 to 1Ns2 i 1 200 TN to 1Ns3 200 rr Refresh OFF 300 1 m to 1 4 QV p 1Ns2 Send receive V 1 1 k d t es a a T Each 1 Station
15. 3 3 3 2 1 Module performance Compatibility comparisons 3 3 3 2 2 Cable performance 3 8 3 3 Functional GompariSOnS aiaa aa 3 10 3 4 Switch Settings Comparisons 2 1 1 2 4 0818444 4 4 4 2 1 sedit saisit 3 11 3 5 Parameter Comparisons 3 12 3 5 1 Parameter COMPARISONS etd Ea RA An ka LAU FIR e saadddegaradacceceasandadaaneea d 3 12 3 52 Parameter change example rere tine rer Yer duod eed rire cdd dnd 3 13 36 Program eines eiit iei dein dio alain om do dde p Duet a La Deom 3 23 3 6 1 Comparison of special relays SB and special registers D 5 3 23 3 0 2 Transient Instr ctlOlis iod E Rede ER RR UOI NER AEN RUM EAR RETE RARE NA XR RE 3 27 3 7 Replacement nn sn nennen tenen er nn nnn 3 28 CHAPTER 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 1to 4 31 4 1 List of MELSECNET 10 Alternative Models 4 1 4 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons 4 2 4 2 1 Module performance comparisons incompatible 4 2
16. eene nnns 8 2 8 2 1 Module performance comparisons 4 8 2 8 2 2 Cable performance comparisons 8 4 8 3 Functional Comparisons 8 5 8 4 Switch Settings Comparisons 8 9 8 5 Parameter Comparisons 8 11 8 6 Program Comparisons idt ere ite dec E a oi st ees et dors 8 12 8 6 1 Comparison of VO signals en itte Leine ener 8 12 8 6 2 Buffer memory nen 8 16 8 6 3 Comparison of link special relay SB link special register SW 8 18 9 7 gt ce 8 24 8 8 Parameter Setting Example iecit iie thee eaa Dn 8 25 8 8 1 Parameter setting example the A AnS series 8 25 8 8 2 Parameter setting example on series 8 27 CHAPTER9 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 9 1to9 1 9 1 External 9 1 APPENDICES App 1 to App 4 Appendix 1 Spare parts storage App 1 Appendix 2 Related Manuals 7 2 Appendix 2 1 Replacement handbooks
17. 4 gt Max 2 5km 5 It is necessary to add terminal resistor AGRCON R75 sold separately 2 8 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Twisted pair cable a Overall distance Distance between stations O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET H modul Communication MELSECNET B module Precautions for replacement speed Twisted pair cable Twisted pair icta cable dedicated cable 125kbps 1200m 1200m 1200m 250kbps 600m Change the communication speed from 250Kbps to 312kbps 600 900 312Kbps 500kbps 400m Change the communication speed from 500Kbps to 625kbps 400 600 625Kbps 1Mbps 200m E Change the communication speed from 1Mbps to 1 25Mbps 200m 400m B 1 25Mbps 2 5Mbps 200m 5Mbps Not available 150m New function of MELSECNET H 10Mbps 100m b Cable performance 1 Twisted pair cable Item Specifications KNPEV SB 0 5SQ x 1 1 Cable type Shielded twisted pair cable Number of cores 2 Conductive resistance 20 39 4 O km or lower Insulation resistance 20 10 MQ km or higher Dielectric withstand voltage V min 1000 V AC for one minute Electrostatic capacity 1kHz Characteristic impedance 100kHz Cross section 70 nF km or less on average 110 100
18. 080 02 3 22 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 6 Program Comparisons 3 6 1 Comparison of special relays M SB and special registers D SW 1 Master station special relays Special relays enabled when host station is the master station O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Special relay in the case of MELSECNET 11 master station Corresponding MELSECNET H special relay t P ti f Description Number Description ibility replacement Delete when used LRDP instruction OFF Not accepted sequence program M9200 N 9 received ON Accepted Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions Delete when used in a M9201 LRDP instruction OFF Not completed _ _ sequence program complete ON Completed Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions Delete when used in a LWTP instruction OFF Not accepted sequence program M9202 N E received ON Accepted one A Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions Delete when used in a M9203 LWTP instruction OFF Not completed None sequence program complete ON Completed Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions OFF Parameter Link parameter OFF Normal Receive parameter normal M9206 error in the host ON Abnormal ar error ON Parameter O abnormal Delete when used in a Link p
19. networks Number of stations connected 33 stations Remote master station 1 remote I O in one network station 32 O Applicable cable SOAN O 5C 2V Overall distance 5C 2V 500m 3C 2V 300m Distance between stations 5C 2V 500m Error control system CRC 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link RAS function O special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up download etc with 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated M peripheral device Monitor program up Bun Transient transmission A link instruction refer to Intelligent function download etc m 5 6 2 modules applicable Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 32 points per slot 32 points per slot Number of occupied I O ane I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelli 32 E points points 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote station remote master station 8192 points 2 remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 32 stations of the remote I O sta
20. required 1 a Network 1 3 CPU When replacing integrated type CPU one new slot 32 points is required Z N 4 Duplex loop When the transmission path has to be duplexed changes to an optical Neiwork2 eS loop system etc are required 5 Composite system As a mixture of a PLC de to PLC network and a remote I O network gt is not allowed the series the network has to be divided into two Coaxial loop networks having different network Nos For this reason a separate network module for the remote master station is required 6 Newinstallation A separate coaxial cable is required for the remote stations 71 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than and as the transmission method is different the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter 1 INTRODUCTION 3 Twisted cable system a 2 tier system 1 System configuration example using local stations only MELSECNET B MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loop New installation The installation has to be changed for an optical loop system or a Coaxial bus coaxial bus system Network 1 Twisted Twisted cables using existing cables Existing cables Process the terminals for MELSECNET H connection OOO Twisted cables us
21. 1 oe ee See 1 A compatible instruction Writes data to the CPU device of the target station of the target network No CPU Network module Network module CPU boy sae eee 72771 Other station n fcd Word device ZNWR word device P 11 write Fixed j i u h H ZNWR i 361 H bog i i 11 ij Hj 11 11 i n 11 11 1 11 ih i 11 11 11 11 11 ii I mimm mtm mmm mm Jl n i mm mmm m m n 1 Lm mm mmm mmm e e m mm 1 Performs remote RUN to the CPU module of the other station CPU Network module Network module CPU Channel 1 i i Channel 2 T RRUN RemoteRUN Channel 3 i Hrun 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 7 i Channel 8 n Ll IL eee Lo mmt reer ee 1 5 51 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK Can be used x Cannot be used Execution Target station station Multiplexed Multiplexed QnPH QnPRH remote remote master sub master Instruction Name Description station station Performs remote STOP to the CPU module of the other station CPU Network module Network mo
22. Transmission speed test replacement is not applied 80185 accept status Transmission speed test 5 0186 completion status 9 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK b Link special register SW Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N Precautions for replacement Dedicated instruction retry SWO000B count setting Specification of remote device SW0014 to SW0017 AM station to be initialized Automatic CC Link startup SWO0052 execution result Added on the Q series SW0058 Detailed LED display status replacement is not applied SW0059 Transmission rate setting Forced master switching SWO005D instruction result Remote device station SWOO05F initialization procedure registration instruction result On the Q series parameter SWO0062 Condition setting switch status Module operating status 7 setting status is stored 5 00 9 E PROM registration status SWOOBA EPROM erasure result 2 No E PROM Refer to Section Number of times when 87 SWOOBB parameters can be registered UC to Remote device station initialization procedure SWO0110 to SWO11F registration execution SW0140 to SW0143 SW0144 to SW0147 SW0148 SW0149 SW0183 SW0184 to SW0187 individual information target 1 to 16 Compatible CC Link V
23. 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 5 2 1 Example of changing parameters on 2 tier system The following shows examples of how to change the LB LW network parameters when replacing the MELSECNET Il with MELSECNET H As MELSECNET Il has three operation modes the examples are shown for each operation mode MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET mode The following shows the procedure for changing the parameters in the case of a MELSECNET mode 2 tier system configuration The MELSECNET master station is replaced with the MELSECNET H control station and MELSECNET local stations are replaced with MELSECNET H normal stations MELSECNET MELSECNET H Optical loop QO6HCPU A3ACPU Q02HCPU A2ACPU Link parameter setting range Optical loop B W 0 100 200 300 380 3FF M L1 L2 L3 Empty A MELSECNET H module set as normal station requires network parameter setting For replacement of MELSECNET II module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU newly set network parameters The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET H Common parameter B Refresh parameter Network range assignment 1Mp1 O A Refer to example in c 2 Refer to example in c 3 1Ns2 A Refer to example in d 2 1Ns3 Refer to example 2 1N
24. Can be selected from 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps Transmission speed 10Mbps O Max cable overall Differs depending on the transmission speed distance Max Refer to the manual transmission distance 64 stations Note that it has to be satisfied with the following conditions 1 2 x b 3 x c 4 d 64 a Number of 1 station occupied modules b Number of 2 station occupied modules Max number of stations Number of 3 station occupied modules For master station d Number of 4 station occupied modules 16 x A 54 x B 88 x S 2304 A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 stations B Number of remote device stations lt 42 stations C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations 26 stations Number of occupied 1 to 4 stations Switched with P 1 to 4 stations Switched with GX Developer parameter stations GX Developer parameter DIP switch settings are required For local station settings Remote I O RX 2048 points Maximum number of link Remote register RWw 256 points points per system 2 Remote register RWr 256 points Remote station local Remote I O RX RY 32 points Local station 30 points station Remote register RWw 4 points Link points per station register RWr 4 points Communication method Broad cast polling method
25. MOS number 0 to 64 number of the host station Stores the total D9244 Number eel dae number of slave SWO056 Toni number of link number device stations stations stations stations that is set with the parameters Number of i Th t f hips Stores cumulative total SWOOB8 to Various error Various error tes 2 09245 detection k each error cause is of receive errors SWOOC7 counters counters times stored D9248 SW0084 Stores local stations in Stores the CPU D9249 Local stati SW0085 Each station CPU ER 2 MR a STOP or PAUSE zem E RUN status of each D9250 P status 0086 station D9251 SW0087 D9252 SWO0074 Local station error Stores the local station SW0075 Cyclic transmission Stores the cyclic T status number other than the status of each transmission status D9254 host which is in error SW0076 station of each station D9255 SW0077 2 69 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 6 2 Transient instructions 1 MELSECNET II dedicated instruction Dedicated instructions that were used on MELSECNET II need to be replaced with the following dedicated instructions on MELSECNET H The table below shows a comparison between dedicated instructions on MELSECNET II and dedicated instructions on MELSECNET H The table also shows reference items in the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC Network Check these reference items be
26. QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU and QO6UDHCPU which can replace the AnS QnAS series The specifications and functions of the Q1TOUDEHCPU to Q100UDEHCPU are the same as those of the modules described above although the program and memory capacities increase mCPU module model ACPU Generic term for MELSEC A series programmable controller CPUs AnSCPU Generic term for MELSEC AnS series programmable controller CPUs A AnSCPU Generic term for MELSEC A series and MELSEC AnS series programmable controller CPUs Generic term for the AINCPU ATNCPUP21 R21 AINCPUP21 S3 A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 AnNCPU A2NCPUP21 R21 A2NCPUP21 R21 S1 A2NCPUP21 S3 S4 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 R21 and A3NCPUP21 S3 AnACP Generic term for the A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A3ACPU A2ACPUP21 R21 A2ACPUP21 R21 Loa S1 and ASACPUP21 R21 AnUCPU Generic term for the A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2USCPU 205 51 i and A2USHCPU S1 AnN AnACPU Generic term for the ANNCPU and AnACPU AnN AnA AnSCPU Generic term for the ANNCPU AnACPU AnSCPU QnACPU Generic term for MELSEC QnA series programmable controller CPUs QnASCPU Generic term for MELSEC QnAS series programmable controller CPUs Generic term for MELSEC QnA series and MELSEC QnAS series programmable controller QnA QnASCPU CPUs Generic term for A series AnS series QnA series and QnAS series programmable controller A AnS QnA QnASCPU CPUs QCPU Generic term for MELSEC Q series programmable controller
27. 3C 2V the overall distance and 5C 2V distance between stations becomes shorter Either use 6 10 Overalldistance 3C 2V 10km 3C 2V 300m A6BR10 DC type repeater 5C 2V 10km 5C 2V 500m unit or configure a separate network Distance between 3C 2V 500m 3C 2V 300m 2 stations 5C 2V 500m 5C 2V 500m A type repeater unit Maximum number New MELSECNET H 239 A of networks parameter mandatory Communication Nothing to be noted though Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method A the communication method differs Nothing to be noted though Transmission Nie Duplex loop Single bus the transmission method method differs Modulation Nothing to be noted though method Encoding Modulation method CMI method Encoding method Manchester code the modulation method method differs T mission RE EE HDLC standards frame format o format Error control 16 12 v5 CRC X X 1 and retry by a time over system The loopback functi t Loop back function due to error dod on pns be used coaxial bus detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link RAS function A system To use the loopback Diagnostic function for checking local lines qe function using an optical loop link lines system is recommended Number of CPU int ted type 0 point Wh lacing fi CPU 9 portis 32 points per slot I O assignment intel
28. System configuration MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H remote I O network The following table lists CPU modules that can be installed on MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET H remote I O network The table shows in the case using a module for optical loop The same applies in the case using a module for a coaxial loop coaxial bus Master station Remote I O station CPU module Network module QJ72LP25 25 A 1S J72QLP25 15 721 25 QCPU QJ71LP21 25 excluding Basic model QCPU QCPU QJ71LP21 25 x x Basic model QCPU QnA QnASCPU A 1S J71QLP21 x AnU AnUS H CPU A 1S J71LP21 x AnN AnA AnSCPU A 1S J71LP21 x x excluding AnUS H CPU be installed Cannot be installed 5 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons 5 2 1 Module performance comparisons 1 A AnS series a Performance comparison of remote master station 1 Performance comparison of AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 and QJ71LP21 25 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible 5 3 Specifications Compati Precautions for replacement AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 bility Maximum number LX LY 8192 points of link points LB 8192 points 16384 points network LW 8192 points 16384 points lt Remote master station gt remote I O station LY LB 8 2 x LW
29. This section describes the method to perform data transmission reception between existing A AnSCPU in MELSECNET II and added QCPU by sequence program using a gateway set This method is useful when the link refresh parameter in the inter link data transfer cannot be set because the transmission range of MELSECNET II is located in the middle 1 System configuration example a Configuration of the existing MELSECNET lI An example of the existing system configuration is as follows master station M ASACPU local station 1 L1 A2ACPU local station 2 L2 A1SHCPU remote I O station and remote I O station 4 R4 MELSECNET II composite mode 2 tier b Configuration after QCPU addition By newly adding the gataway station Q2ASCPU L5 1Mp1 to the above configuration 1 and connecting it to the QCPU 1Ns2 in MELSECNET 10 link data relay is performed between MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II composite mode 5 1 1 2 tier MELSECNET10 Gateway set Gateway station 6 10 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH 2 Network range assignment for MELSECNETV II a LX LY network range assignment 0 400 500 600 Actual I O Empty b BW network range assignment before addition of the gateway station L5 1Mp1 Assignment in the area of 200 to 3FF is W only B WO 10 300 380 5FF Rud m Empty uud M second half L1 second half a half M R
30. b Distance between stations 1 Sl optical fiber cable O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNET II MELSECNET H module Compat Precautions for module optical loop ibility replacement optical loop SI optical fiber cable L type 1km 500m 200m A 2 Ht 500 300 100 Hp n A Refer below SI optical fiber cable AN 2P L1 1km 500m 200m H PCF optical fiber cable 1km 1km 400m Refer 2 below Broad band H PCF optical fiber cable 1km 1km QSI optical fiber cable 1km 1km 1 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications either change the type of optical fiber cable or install a gateway station midway along existing cables 2 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications use at a communication speed of 10 Mbps change the type of optical fiber cable or install a gateway station midway along existing cables 2 optical fiber cable O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNET II module MELSECNET H module Compat ti f 1 t optical loop optical loop ibility OUI TELA optical fiber cable 2km 2km 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 Coaxial cable a Overall distance O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSEC
31. i 0 i Logical channel 5 Channel 5 Logical channel 7 Channel 7 t Logical channel 8 Channel 8 Channel 8 1 master sub master station station READ SREAD Other station word device read Reads the CPU device data of the target station of the target network No in 16 bit units CPU Network module Network module CPU Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel6 it k 1 1 HH H Word device 2594 i Channel 7 Channel 8 jl 2594 WRITE SWRITE REQ Other station word device write Requesting transient transmission to other stations Writes data to the CPU device of the target station of the target network No in 16 bit units SWRITE can turn ON the device of the target station CPU Network module Network module CPU Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 361 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Issues remote RUN and clock data read write requests to other stations CPU Network module Network module CPU Channel 1 Channel 2 L Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 To next page 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O
32. to station test switch 6 Station to station test 6 Internal self loopback test Check network No group No slave station 25Mbps gt and station No in GX Developer 7 Self loopback test 7 Hardware test 25Mbps network diagnostics host 8 Internal self loopback test Using QJ71LP21G and information 9 H W test QJ71BR11 D Network No check Sets the mode E Group No check lt Setting range gt F Station No check 0 Online 1 Self loopback test 2 Internal self loopback test 3 Hardware test Condition cx Set in GX Developer network Sets the operation conditions A setting switch parameters 5 35 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK b Switch settings comparisons of remote I O station Switch name Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description series Q series Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Mode setting switch MELSECNET 10 module Sets the mode lt Setting range gt 0 Online 2 Offline Loop test forward loop Loop test reverse loop Station to station test master station Station to station test slave station Self loopback test Internal self loopback test H W test Station No check do MELSECNET H module Using QJ72LP25 25 Sets the mode lt Setting range gt 0 Online 10Mbps 1 Self loopback test 10Mbps 2 Internal self loopback test
33. B device transmission First half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Transfers B of the host station to the local module First half 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE MELSECNET II B AS THE LOCAL 502040 1 DMOV U20 6102420 502040 2 DMOV U20 6102420 D2040 4 DMOV MOV SFR U20 BMOV 659222 D2040 5 DMOV MOV SFR U20 BMOV 659222 SD2040 F 0920 06259 020 6315 207 5 400 MOV MOV MOV U20 G4 wozo 920 G6 wozo 920 G10 70 22 K4B0Z0 U20 G12 70 22 4 070 45 1240 501243 SET 502042 502043 502044 20 21 20 21 20 22 K4 71 70 22 K4 K1 K13 DY211 DY216 DY216 70 71 22 W device reception 1 First half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Obtains W of the other stations from the local module First half W device reception 2 First half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Obtains W of the other stations from the local module First half B device reception 1 First half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Obtains B of the other stations from the local module First half B device reception 2 First half Start No 20 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Obtains B
34. Baton pass status host 5 0047 5 0047 Data link status of each d 580049 580049 station Baton pass status of each n 80070 80070 station Cyclic transmission status of e ia E 5 0074 5 0074 each station b Link special register SW Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Number AnU AnUS H QnA Compat Precautions for QCPU QnASCPU ibility replacement MELSECNET H module MELSECNET 10 module Baton pass status of each station Cyclic transmission status of each station SW0070 to SW0073 SW0070 to SW0073 O SW0074 to SW0077 SW0074 to SW0077 O For link special relay SB and link special register SW that are not described in this section refer to each manual 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 6 2 Comparison of dedicated instructions 1 A AnSCPU Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QCPU Compat Precautions for Instruction name A AnSCPU NE MELSECNET H module ibility replacement MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET 10 mode Instruction format differs ZNRD instruction Reads the device data of other station Change the sequence program Instruction format differs ZNWR instruction Writes data to the device of other station Change the sequence program LRDP instruction cannot Reads the device data of be used Change them to LRDP instruction other stati
35. Nothing to be noted Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Flag synchronization method A though the methods are different Encoding method NRZI method Transmission method Bus RS 485 Transmission format HDLC standards Error control system CRC X16 X12 5 1 Connection cane CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance i cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable O Automatic return function RAS function Slave station detach function Error detection with link special relay register GX Developer parameter Number of parameter settings are performed i i 2 umes A instead of the parameter E PROM PUN 2 registration to Number of occupied I O 32 points I O assignment 32 points I O assignment points 8 2 special 32 points intelli 32 points 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 2 QnA QnAS series Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 Can be selected QJ61BT11N ibility replacement Transmission from 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps SMbps 10Mbps O Max cable overall distance Differs depending on the transmission speed Max transmission Refer to the manual O distance 64 stations Note that it has to be satisfied with the following conditions 1 x a 2 x b 3 x c
36. of link points LB 8192 points 16384 points network LW 8192 points 16384 points lt Remote I O station gt Remote I O station gt Maximum number of link master station remote master station 2 points per station LX LB 8 2x LW S LX LB 8 2x LW S O 1600 bytes 1600 bytes Max number of I O points ere ee TE per remote I O station v porns points o This is a new function from M 8192 points A MELSECNET H 222 0 2048 points This is a new function from u vi i Poen E MELSECNET H i This is a new function from station D 12288 points A MELSECNET H This is a new function from SD 2048 points A MELSECNET H Communication speed 10Mbps met Nothing to be noted though the Communication method Token ring method Token bus method communication method differs Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method Manchester code The coaxial bus system cannot use the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus A Using the optical loop system is recommended for using the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to 255 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC cannot be set Maximum number of to PLC networks and to PLC networks and networks
37. wo w100 w200 w400 w500 K4B100 K4B200 4 400 4 500 1200 W12A0 4 1200 K4B12A0 w1000 W10A0 81140 W11A0 wiz40 K4B1000 K4B10A0 K4B1140 K4B11A0 K4B1240 260 w500 K4B2 60 K4B500 K160 K160 K96 K160 K160 K10 K10 K6 K10 K10 K160 K96 K10 K6 END 6 15 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE 1 B AS THE LOCAL CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE B AS THE LOCAL STATION When adding the QCPU to or replacing a module with the QCPU in the existing MELSECNET II B connect the QCPU as the local station without changing the existing network and perform cyclic communication for sharing data This chapter describes methods for connecting the QCPU to the existing MELSECNETE II B as the local station 7 1 Application that Connects the QCPU as the Local Station 1 Replacing a module with the QCPU without changing the existing network at Replaced station Replace the A series programmable controller with the Q series programmable controller Example System before transition System after transition Q series programmable controller main base unit VO Master station Qn I O yo vO High Performance model QCPU VO Local station MELSECNET 11 15671 Local station data link
38. 1 The same specifications as the MELSECNET B twisted pair cable To use the existing MELSECNET B twisted pair cables process the terminals For details refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network SH 080049 2 CC Link dedicated cable Product name Mdele name FANC 110SBH Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable FA CBL200PSBH 2 9 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 3 Functional Comparisons O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description MELSECNET Il module MELSECNET B module X Y are used to perform 1 1 communications between the master station and local stations and the master station and remote MELSECNET H module LX LY are used to perform 1 1 communications between the control station and normal stations Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Cyclic transmission A stations LB LW are used to perform B W are used to perform communications between the communications between the control station and all normal master station and all local stations stations The READ WRITE ZNRD The LRDP LWTP instructions ZNWR instructions issued issued from the master station from the control station are are used to read write devices Correct the LRDP LWTP used to read write devices on on the progr
39. Comparison of link special relay SB link special register SW The table below shows only link special relay SB and link special register SW to be used in interlock program Device name and device No of MELSECNET H module are described in link device of internal MELSECNET H module Changing sequence program should be performed after checking the refreshed device of link device in refresh parameters AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU When MELSECNET 10 module is mounted to the CPU module of the AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU link special relay SB and link special register SW are assigned to special relay and special register of CPU module For replacing with a MELSECNET H module change sequence program in reference to the following a Link special relay SB O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible AnN AnA AnSCPU QCPU A MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module tg Precautions for replacement ibili Description Number Description y LRDP LRDP instruction cannot be used M9204 instruction OFF Not completed _ _ When using it in sequence ON Completed program delete corresponding complete part LWTP instruction cannot be used LWTP ae A OFF Not completed When using it in sequence M9205 instruction ON Completed program delete corresponding complete part OFF Normal OFF Normal M9211 Module stat 9 odule status ON Abnormal 80020
40. Network module In the last stage where all stations become the Section 7 2 QCPUS removing the local station data link modules and replacing the MELSECNET H modules are required ar Data link is possible by only changing the parameter Modification on software Section 7 4 according to the added station Only the addition of a network and program modification are sufficient for adding a station Station addition is easy Extensibility Data link is possible by only changing the laying of optical loop coaxial loop and twisted pair cable according to the added station without changing the existing network 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 Replacement of the MELSECNET 10 for A AnS QnA QnAS Series with the MELSECNET H for Q Series The following shows the configuration of a MELSECNET H network system for Q after transition and the system configuration precautions for transition for each of the system configurations for MELSECNET 10 network systems for A AnS QnA QnAS series For details refer to CHAPTER 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK and CHAPTER 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE NETWORK 1 PLC to PLC network Pay attention to the following common precautions when replacing PLC to PLC networks Common precautions 1 Network parameters must be set for MELSECNET H module of normal stations When replacing MELSECNET 10 module mounted on the CPU module
41. Stops cyclic transmission temporarily with GX Developer etc Communicates only when communication requests are issued between each stations Communication using dedicated link instruction and GX Developer etc ZNFR instruction and ZNTO instruction cannot be used Change them to REMFR instruction and REMTO instruction Routing function Reserved station function assignment function Extension functions Constant link scan function Multiplex transmission function Return sequence station number setting function ZNFR ZNTO instruction access number setting function Performs transient transmission to other stations of which network No are different Treats the stations which are to be connected in the future as reserved stations By specifying the stations which are not connected as reserved stations communication error does not occur Sets the module configuration of the remote station Keeps link scan time constant Performs high speed communication using duplex transmission path forward loop reverse loop Sets the number of stations that can return to system during one link scan Sets the number of transient transmissions a total of entire one network that can be executed during one link scan Set the function with the PLC parameter of the remote I O module The number of transient transmissions executed during one link scan is two fixed To next pag
42. be changed Optical loop 2 CPU When replacing from an integrated Optical loop type CPU one new slot 32 points is required Network Network Composite system As a mixture of a PLC 1 2 to PLC network and a remote I O network is not allowed on the Q series the network has to be divided into two networks having different network Nos For this reason a separate network module for the remote master station is required 4 New installation A separate optical cable is required for the remote stations 51 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than that of MELSECNET II the distance between stations may become shorter d 3 tier system 1 System configuration example using local stations only MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loop Optical loop 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables optical cables etc has to O O eem mee 2 CPU When replacing from an integrated type CPU one new slot 32 points is 1Ns2 2MP4 required 3 Number of stations When 65 modules Network 2 connected measures e g dividing into two networks of 64 modules or less having a different network No are required 1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than that of MEL
43. lt o e Output module Output module Special module amp m 5 lt lt lt e Output module Output module lt e lt 3 A lt 5 kal lt lt fo lt a 3 13 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O a Setting ranges of MELSECNET link parameters X0 200 28F 400 4BF 600 67F 700 77F used by the host R4 R4 L2 L3 station Area for M R Area for M L YO 230 30F 480 59F 680 700 77F used by the host R1 R4 L2 L3 station Area for M R Area for M L BO 100 17F 200 27 M L2 L3 gt Area for M L WO 100 17F 200 2BF 300 310320 341 360 36F380 39F M L2 L3 R1 R4 R1 R1 gt Area for M R Area for M R 4 gt 4 gt Area for M L Area for M R 3 14 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O b Setting ranges of MELSECNETIH link parameters 1 Setting ranges of network 1 link parameters X0 200 600 67F 700 77F y o area used by the host L2 L3 station h Area for M L YO 230 680 700 used by the host 12 13 station Area for M L BO 100 17F 200 27F M L2 L3 Area for M
44. 0 Necessary setting setting Already set Setifitisneeded setting Already set Start No Valid module y 2 d during other station access Interlink transmission par ameter Input the start 1 0 No installed in the module in 16 point unit Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Check End Cancel 2 Network range assignment A3ACPU MELSECNET master station Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End Monitoring time 201 10 2 Switch screens settings 0230 030F_ 0200 0200 0480 059F 0400 oF 192 3 Network range assignment MELSECNET master station Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End Monitoring time 201 10 Switch screens LB LW settings 0000 _00FF 0000 0 0300 0310 0100 O17F 0100 017 0200 027 0200 02 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O d MELSECNET local station remote I O station As all stations perform cyclic communication according to the network range assignments of the master station A3ACPU the network range assignment parameters of local stations and remote I O stations need not be set MELSECNETIH control station network 1 The follo
45. 0100 mz 128 0500 os7F 128 0500 1 0180 oF 128 0180 DIFF 0580 128 0580 3 Refresh parameter ASUCPU MELSECNET II 3 tier master station m Assignment method Points Start Start End r Transient transmission error history status C venite Hold Link side PLC side Points Stat End BlockNo Points Stat LB lt gt B transmission 1 1320 0000 1920 0000 LW lt gt W transmission 1 1920 0000 077 1920 0000 LX LY X Y transmission d MELSECNET II 3 tier local station 11 12 As the cyclic communication is performed according to the network range assignments of the 3 tier master station there is no parameter setting for network range assignment on 3 tier local stations 2 48 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC e MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 For MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 change the settings of MELSECNET II 2 tier first half second half setting by Assigning LB LW first half second half size to each station by the setting of Network range assignment Common parameters Dividing the data into the first half LB LW and second half LB LW and transferring them by the setting of Setting1 and Setting2 of Station inherent parameter MELSECNET H network 1
46. 10Mbps Hardware test 10Mbps Online 25Mbps Self loopback test 25Mbps Internal self loopback test 25Mbps 7 Hardware test 25Mbps Using QJ72LP25G and QJ72BR15 Sets the mode Setting range 0 Online 1 Self loopback test 2 Internal self loopback test 3 Hardware test Set offline and loop test in GX Developer network parameters Substitute the forward loop reverse loop test for the station to station test Check network No group No and station No in GX Developer network diagnostics host information 5 36 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 2 QnA QnAS series 5 37 Switch name Network No setting switch a Remote master station switch settings comparisons O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series MELSECNET 10 module Sets the network No Q series MELSECNET H module Precautions for replacement Set in GX Developer network parameters Sets the mode lt Setting range gt Using QJ71LP21 25 and QJ71LP21S 25 Sets the mode lt Setting range gt 0 Online 10Mbps 0 Online 1 Self loopback test 10Mbps 2 Offline 2 Internal self loopback test Set offline and loop test in GX 3 Loop test forward loop 10Mbps Developer network parameters 4 Loop test reverse loop 3 Hardware test 10Mbps Substitute the forward loop 5 Statio
47. 11 to other H ReEaH Channel 4_H STOP 11 ij 11 stations names n 6 i4 m 7 Channel 8 ANE emm JL enm mmm Jiu m mmm mm 4 To next page 4 28 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK Can be used by both the control and normal stations x Cannot be used Execution Target station station Instruction Name Description AnU AnUS H CPU Receives the channel data sent with SEND by the interrupt program and immediately reads it to the CPU device The processing is completed when the instruction is executed Receive CPU 1 Network module ______ Network module _____ ____ CPU ____ RECVS message 1 Channel 1 Logical channel 1 channel 1 completed i Channel 2 Logical channel 2 channel 2 i HH senn H Logical channel 3 channel 3 in 1 Scan Channel 4 N Logical channel 4 channel 4 i Channel interrupt program Channel 6 Logical channel 6 channel 6 4110 1 7 Logical channel 7 channel 7 i LChannel 8 Logical channel 8 channel 8 A compatible instr
48. 128 0180 128 0580 OsFF 256 0300 OSFF Disable 2 124 0200 128 Oe7F 256 0400 O4FF Disable 3 34 0000 384 0400 057F 768 0000 O2FF Disable Reference network range assignment Assignment method P arameter Drive Path C MELSEC Gppw Points Start hama Project Name 002 2 v Board Start End Switch settings screens Reference Read mal f s ees serge 1 120 0180 128 0580 oOsFF 256 0300 2 12 0200 027 128 0600 057 255 osoo ur L 3 s 0000 364 0400 0577 768 0000 O2FF 2 61 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Refresh parameter 002 MELSECNET H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1 2Ns2 0000 _ DIFF DIFF O67F 0000 067F 2 62 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 6 Program Comparisons 2 6 1 Comparison of special relays M SB and special registers D SW 1 Master station special relays Special relays enabled when host station is the master station Special relay in the case of MELSECNET 11 master station Description Number Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Corresponding MELSECNETIH special relay Description Compat Precautions for ibility replacement Delete when
49. 800 800 400 n to 1 1 X Tee ee uns i to 1Ns2 i 22123215 d OFF i 5FF i A00 i do 1Ns3 600 i i i 1854 6FF lnc eme memememueeal 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 18 MELSECNET H module set as normal station requires network parameter setting For replacement of MELSECNET Il module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU newly set network parameters The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET H Common parameter Station inherent parameter Refresh parameter Network range assignment 1Mp1 Refer to example in b 2 Refer to example in b 3 Refer to example in b 4 1Ns2 E Refer to example in c 2 Refer to example in c 3 1Ns3 Refer to example 2 Refer to example 3 1Ns4 O A Refer to example in c 2 Refer to example in c 3 O Setting required A Setting required Default setting is also acceptable MELSECNET II master station The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET II master station 1 Network parameter setting M
50. Cannot be used Execution Target station station Instruction Name RSTOP Remote STOP Description Network module Network module Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Remote STOP performed for other stations CPU modules AnU AnUS H CPU RTMRD Other station clock data read Read Clock Data performed for other stations CPU modules Word device Clock data Network module Network module Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 ft 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 RTMWR Other station clock data written Write Clock Data performed for other stations CPU modules H Ew Network module Network module CAMCN Channel 1 Channel2 T Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 jp Channel 4 Clock data 4 30 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 7 Other Precautions 1 Processing time The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A AnS QnA QnAS series and the Q series For details on processing times refer to the manual for the respective module 2 A AnS series replacement precautions Normal station of MELSECNET H module requires network parameter setting For replacement with the QCPU and the MELSECNET H module newly se
51. Station inherent parameter Station inherent parameter Q00 Q01CPU parameter Use QCPUs other than those above Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Inter link data transfer Inter link data transfer A Q00 Q01CPU Use QCPUs other than those above Routing parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other Valid module during other station access station access c Parameter of standby station Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Parameter Q series Compat QnA QnAS series Precautions for replacement name MELSECNET H module ibility MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET 10 mode Network type Network type Starting I O Starting I O No Network No Network No Set the group GX Developer Group No A network parameters Network Set the mode in GX Developer Mode A parameter network parameters Standby station compatible Standby station compatible module module Routing parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other Valid module during other station access station access o 1 Standby station is a station type of simple dual structured system Only the following CPU modules support the simple dual structured system High Performance model QCPU Process CPU 4 23 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 6 Program Comparisons 4 6 1 1
52. Stores the total Maximum Stores the mamur Total number of number of link D9244 station No set in 5 0059 station No link stations stations set in network parameters network parameters Accumulates and SWO00B8 Accumulates and Communication stores the The error count for each error D9245 Error counters stores the various A error count communication error cause is stored SWO00C7 error time times D9248 Other station Stores the CPU RUN SW0084 Each station Stores the RUN to CPU RUN Statis of other station status of each station 9251 status SW0087 status Including the host Cyclic A ous Data link status Stores the data link P transmission 2 of B D9255 of other station status of other station SW0077 status of each each station station 4 25 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 2 AnU AnUS H QnA QnASCPU 4 26 The following device name and device described in link device of internal MELSECNET 10 or MELSECNET H module Changing sequence program should be performed after checking the refreshed device of link device in refresh parameters a Link special relay SB Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Number AnU AnUS H QnA QCPU Compat Precautions for QnASCPU ibility replacement MELSECNET H module MELSECNET 10 module Module status SB0020 SB0020
53. 2 1 station o Eehamei3 9 HHREMTO T intelligent function module pehannet6 i LOhamel7 i hannel 8 H 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 7 Replacement Precautions The following shows the replacement precautions when replacing MELSECNET 1 with MELSECNET H 1 Cables For details on precautions for optical cables and coaxial cables refer to Section 2 2 2 Cable performance comparisons 2 System configuration a System configuration using local stations and remote stations MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET H system which is a composite system comprising local stations and remote stations provides high performance functions by making a separation between local stations and remote stations It therefore cannot be configured by a mixture of local stations and remote stations For this reason in a MELSECNET 1 system when replacing a system which comprises a mixture of local stations and remote stations connected to a single master station with a MELSEC H system the following system configuration is necessary Normal stations are connected to a single control station and remote stations are controlled by an additional remote master station the control station in a remote system is defined as the remote master station The following shows
54. 3C 2V 300m A6BR10 DC type repeater 5C 2V 500m unit or configure a separate network Maximum number of networks 239 New MELSECNET H parameter mandatory Communication method Half duplex bit serial method Token bus method Nothing to be noted though the communication method differs Transmission method Single bus Duplex loop Nothing to be noted though the transmission method differs Single bus 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC Specifications MELSECNET B module MELSECNET H module Compat Precautions for mim Optical loop Coaxial bus ibility replacement QJ71LP21 25 QJ71BR11 Encoding method Modulation coding method Encoding Modulation method NRZI method Nothing to be noted though Encoding method method A the modulation method Manchester code differs Transmission HDLC standards frame format format Error control 16 12 v5 CRC X X X 1 retry by time over O system RAS function Diagnostic function for checking local link lines O Occupied I O Standalone 32 points per slot I O 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli points assignment special 32 points 32 points 2 2 2 Cable performance comparisons 1 Optical fiber cable a Overall distance The overall distance 30km does not differ according to the optical fiber cable
55. A Partial change required x Incompatible Signal name Compat Output signal Precautions for replacement AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility Refreshed automatically Delete the sequence 0 Refresh specification Prohibited to use A program of the section corresponding to the function Yn1 Yn2 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Delete the sequence program of the section corresponding to the function Yn4 Module reset request Prohibited to use x When the switch setting is changed turn the power supply of programmable controller system OFF gt ON or reset the programmable controller CPU 5 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Delete the sequence program of the section Data link startup request from corresponding to the function and set parameters Yn6 Prohibited buffer memory parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction Yn7 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Delete the sequence program of the section m Data link startup request from Bened ER corresponding to the function and set parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction E2PROM parameters 9 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Delete the sequence program of the section Parameter registration request to corresponding to the function and set parameters Prohibited to use E PROM with GX Developer or with de
56. Maximum number New MELSECNET H 239 of networks parameter mandatory mmunication Nothing to b ted though th Communicat Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method A n S Sno li Mis e method communication method differs Transmission Duplex method C Modulation method Nothing to be noted though the Modulati thod CMI method Encod thod NRZI cod Encoding method vEncodingmethad ond modulation method differs Transmission HDLC standards frame format O format Error control 16 12 v5 CRC X X 1 retry by a time over system RAS function Loop back Teor due to Miror or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines CPU int ted type 0 point Wh lacing fi CPU integrate ype point 32 points per slot en replacing from di standalone 32 points per slot I O integrated type an additional occupied I O points assignment intelli 32 points assignment special 32 points slot 32 points is required 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 4 b Modules for optical cable O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET Il module MELSECNET H module Optical loop Optical loop QJ71LP21 25 Precautions for replacement Max 2048 points and max number of I O points of CPU module on master station MEL
57. Module status ON Abnormal OFF Online ON Offline self OFF Online Online host Onli itch 9240 nos loopback test 80043 e 81 ON Other than status host station station to online station test When 5 0090 turns on check Forward loop OFF Normal OFF Normal the loop condition with 5 0090 M9241 5 0090 Host tat status ON Abnormal Sieus ON Abnormal or check by host bit of SW0091 to 0094 When 80090 turns on check Reverse loop OFF Normal OFF Normal the loop condition with 5 0090 M9242 5 0090 Host tat status ON Abnormal mem ON Abnormal or check by host bit of SW0095 to SW0098 OFF Loopback Loopback OFF Normal M9243 ped ON Loopback 80090 Host loop status ON Abnormal the loop condition with SW0090 1 or check by SW0099 or SWOO9A execution M9246 i Received 2 ON Not received 9 Control station part M9250 Parameter OFF Reseed SB0054 PAMET ORE piss unreceived ON Not received receive status ON Unreceived Communication OFF Normal Host data link OFF Normal M3251 status ON Abnormal 550049 status ON Abnormal 4 24 To next page 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible AnN AnA AnSCPU QCPU E A MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module C Precautions for replacement ibi
58. Monitoring Monitoring time time BW setting LB LW setting XY setting LX LY setting Network range O master Network range 1 master assignment station assignment station specification specification parameter Reserved parameter Reserved station station O designation designation Supplemental Supplemental settings settings Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Station inherent parameter Station inherent parameter Q00 Q01CPU Use QCPUs other than those above Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Inter link data transfer Inter link data transfer A Q00 Q01CPU Use QCPUs other than those above Routing parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other Valid module during other station access station access b Parameter of normal station Description Parameter QnA QnAS series name MELSECNET 10 module Q series MELSECNET H module MELSECNET 10 mode Compat ibility 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for replacement Network type Network type Starting I O Starting I O No Network Network O Set the group No in GX Developer Group No A network parameters Set the mode in GX Developer Mode A network parameters Disabled when mounted to the Q00J
59. Network Modules Transition from Large L 08050ENG B a Small Type Series to Q Series Handbook Communications 5 Transition from MELSEC A0J2H Series to Q Series Handbook 1 08060 Transition from MELSECNET MINI S3 A2C I O to CC Link 6 L 08061ENG Handbook 7 Transition from MELSEC I OLINK to CC Link LT Handbook L 08062bENG Transition of CPUs MELSEC Redundant System Handbook 8 L 08117ENG Transition from Q4ARCPU to QnPRHCPU 3 Transition Examples Manual name Manual number A large AnS small MELSEC A QnA L AnS QnAS Small T iti nA Large AnS QnAS Small Transition L NAJOB121E Examples 4 Others No Manual name Manual number ids A large small Procedures for Replacing Positioning Module AD71 with QD75 0060 1 App 2 Appendix 2 2 A AnS series No Manual name Manual number Model code Type MELSECNET MELSECNET B Data Link System 1 66350 13JF70 Referece Manual Type MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual 2 66440 1JE33 PLC to PLC network Type MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual 3 SH 3509 13JE72 Remote I O network CC Link System Master Local Module Type AJ61BT11 4 66721 13J872 A1SJ61BT11 User s Manual Appendix 2 3 QnA QnAS series Manual name Model code For QnA Q4AR MELSEC
60. Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks remote Maximum number of networks O networks Maximum number of groups 9 O 64 stations Control station 1 normal station 63 one network Applicable cable Gl optical cable Overall distance 30km Distance between stations optical cable 2km Error control system CRC X6 X12 X5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Prevention of system down by switching the control RAS function O station Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions N N communication N N communication e g monitor program e g monitor program For comparison of dedicated Transient transmission up download up download link instruction refer to Dedicated link Dedicated link Section 4 6 2 instruction instruction 32 points per slot I O 32 points per slot I O Number of occupied I O assignment special 32 assignment intelli 32 points points 4 9 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK d Performance compari
61. X IL 1 384 0100 oz 384 moo or 1 3 Refresh parameter A3UCPU MELSECNET II 2 tier master station M Assignment method Points Start Start End r Transient transmission error history status C Hold E Link side PLC side Points Stat End BlockNo LB lt gt B transmission 1 8 transmission 1 LX LY X Y transmission 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC b MELSECNET Il 2 tier local station L2 As the cyclic communication is performed according to the network range assignments of the 2 tier master station A3UCPU there is no parameter setting for network range assignment on 2 tier local stations c MELSECNET Il 2 tier local station L1 3 tier master station m The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET 1 2 tier local station L1 3 tier master station m A3UCPU 1 Network parameter setting MELSECNET 1 2 tier local station L1 3 tier master station m Module No 1 Module No 2 Module No 3 Module No 4 Network type MNET II Local station MNET II Master station X None Stat 70 No wm Network No JE epis o 2 Newoekmngessgmet Refresh parameters 4 gt
62. ibility gt i gt I gt gt gt gt I gt gt gt gt gt gt Precautions for replacement Cannot be configured on the remote I O network of MELSECNET H Configure two networks 5 44 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK e Parameter of parallel remote sub master station O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Parameter were QnA QnAS series Q series MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module Network type Starting I O No Network No Network Svom Refresh parameters parameter Routing parameters Valid module during other station access f Parameter of remote I O station Compat tI Precautions for replacement ibility Cannot be configured on the remote I O network of MELSECNET H Configure two networks gt bbb When mounting the intelligent function module on the remote I O station set the parameter When mounting only I O modules the operation is available even if the parameter is not set It is operated with default value Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Parameter QnA QnAS series MELSECNET 10 module Q series MELSECNETI H module name PLC system setting Compat ENS Precautions for replacement ibility New parameter of MELSECNET H
63. 20 21 20 21 20 21 20 22 K4 71 70 22 K4 71 20 22 K4 71 70 22 K4 71 70 22 K4 71 W device reception 1 First half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Obtains W of the other stations from the local module First half W device reception 2 First half Start No 20 No of words Z1 Obtains W of the other stations from the local module First half W device reception 1 Latter half Start No 20 No of words Z1 Obtains W of the other stations from the local module Latter half W device reception 2 Latter half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Obtains W of the other stations from the local module Latter half X device reception Start No 20 No of words 21 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Obtains X of the host station from the local module B device reception 1 First half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Obtains B of the other stations from the local module First half B device reception 2 First half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Obtains B of the other stations from the local module First half B device reception 1 Latter half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Obtains B of the other stations from the local module L
64. 23 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ72QLP25 NO QJ72LP25 25 ibility replacement A1SJ72QLP25 Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up RAS function download etc with 1 1 communication For comparison of peripheral device Monitor program up 7 Transient transmission A dedicated link instruction Intelligent function download etc e refer to Section 5 6 2 modules applicable Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 25 2 Performance comparison of AJ72QLP25G QJ72LP25G Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ72QLP25G QJ72LP25G ibility replacement Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points network W 8192 points 16384 points Maximum number of link Remote I O station remote master station points per station X B 8 2 x W S 1600 bytes Max
65. 4 2 2 Cable performance nennen 4 13 4 3 Functional Comparisons Can aN dada 4 15 4 4 Switch Settings Comparisons vines cepa a deua npa 4 18 45 Parameter Comparisons 4 20 4 6 Program Comparisons 4 24 4 6 1 Comparison of link special relay SB link special register SW 4 24 4 6 2 Comparison of dedicated instructions 4 27 47 4 31 CHAPTER 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 1 to 5 53 5 1 List of MELSECNET 10 Alternative 5 5 1 5 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons 5 3 5 2 1 Module performance comparisons 5 3 5 22 Cable performance comparisons 5 29 5 3 Functional Comparisons 5 31 5 4 Switch Settings 5 35 5 5 E 5 39 5 6 Program CompariSOns ciis Fu de E o do Rd 5 46 5 6 1 Comparison of link special relay SB link special register SW
66. 5C 2V o Overall distance 300m V i 5C 2V 500m o Distance between stations 5C 2V 500m o Error control system CRC 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link RAS function special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated 23 download etc with Monitor program up JE Transient transmission A link instruction refer to Section peripheral device download etc 562 Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 32 points per slot 32 points per slot Number of occupied I O INS I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelli 32 i points points 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote station remote master station 8192 points 52 remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station 32 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 8 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK b Performance comparison of remote I O stations 1 Compar
67. As the cyclic communication is performed according to the network range assignments of the 3 tier master station A3UCPU there is no parameter setting for network range assignment 3 tier local stations 2 31 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC e MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 change the settings of MELSECNET 1 2 tier master station by Assigning LB LW to each station by the setting of Network range assignment Common parameters Performing B W refreshment by the setting of Refresh parameters MELSECNET H network 1 Control station 1Mp3 Common parameters LB LW Link refresh 2 32 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 QO6HCPU 1 Network parameter setting QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 2 Newok pe mode satori INO Ne Stating 0 Na Na _ Tota ations EL Staton No as Sa C RN Rn Mode ff z m JY
68. CPUs 14 About symbols used in figures 1 MELSECNET H m Master station 10 Local station Control station C Remote station stands for the station W stands for the network No and Normal station Remote master station Remote station stands for the station 15 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 1 1 Transition from MELSECNET II MELSECNET B to MELSECNET H 1 1 1 Transition to the Q series To replace the MELSECNET II and the MELSECNET B system with the series the following methods can be used Replace with the MELSECNET H system Keep the existing MELSECNET II network and replace some of the systems with the QCPU Or add the QCPU For replacement with the MELSECNET 10 H refer to Section 1 1 2 For replacement with the Q series or add the series with the existing MELSECNET II refer to Section 1 1 3 The following shows the configuration of the Q series MELSECNET H system after the transition and the system configuration precautions at transition for each of the MELSECNET II MELSECNET B system configurations For details refer to CHAPTER 2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET 1 AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC NETWORK and CHAPTER 3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET 1 AND MELSECNET B REMOTE NETWORK 1 INTRODUCTION Network type 2 tier 3 tier Component stati
69. D9236 the forward loop line 5 0095 D9237 loop error and reverse loop line SWO0096 Reverse loop Stores the reverse The error on the loop status of each loop status of each line of the reverse loop D9238 SW0097 station station is stored D9239 SW0098 Numberor Gods Stores cumulative total SWOOB8 to Various error Various error he ertor count ton 09240 detection each error cause is of receive errors SWOOC7 counters counters times stored 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 6 2 Transient instructions 1 MELSECNET dedicated instruction 3 27 Dedicated instructions that were used MELSECNET must be replaced with the following dedicated instructions on MELSECNET H The following table shows a comparison between dedicated instructions on MELSECNET and dedicated instructions on MELSECNET H The table also shows reference items in the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network Check these reference items before changing the sequence program MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H NET H m Reference Instruction Instruction Description of Category Description Category item in the name name change Reading data The master station Reads data from from buffer Reading data reads the data of buffer memory on Section RFRP from remote specia
70. Data link status check SB SW Data link status can be checked This check can be used for the interlock etc of sequence program To next page 9 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N Precautions for Offline test The following tests can be performed Hardware test Standalone module operation check Line test Module connection status check Parameter check test Parameter setting check The following tests can be performed Hardware test Standalone module operation check Line test Module connection status check replacement The specification method of hardware test line test differs For details on the specification method refer to the manual Check the set parameter in GX Developer network parameters Parameter registration function The following two types of parameters are set using GX Developer Network parameter Automatic refresh parameter Scan synchronous function Synchronous mode Data link with scan synchronized with sequence program is available Asynchronous mode Data link not synchronized with sequence program is available Standby master function Data link can be continuously performed by switching to the standby master station at the master station error Dedicated instruction RIRD RIWT RIRCV RISEND RIFR
71. FFFH 2560 to 4095 access buffer Random access buffer 1000 to 1FFFH 4096 to 8191 Communication buffer Communication buffer 2000 to 2FFFH 8192 to 12287 Automatic updating buffer Automatic updating buffer 3000 to 12288 to 16383 i _ Area for Var The function was added to Q series 4000 to 53FFH 16384 to 21503 modules 5400H to 7FFFH 21504 to 32767 FFOHIBISEND MES 8 17 9 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK 8 6 3 Comparison of link special relay SB link special register SW 1 A AnS series 8 18 The following table shows SB SW which different application the series and the series a Link special relay SB Number Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Name AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 Master station switching data QJ61BT11N Refresh instruction at standby Precautions for replacement The specifications of A AnS 5 0001 mui series and Q series are the link start master switching same Refresh instruction when Use for setting network 5 0003 changing parameters by the parameters with RLPASET dedicated instruction instruction Master station duplication error SB0007 canceling request Transmission speed test 5 000 request Added on the Q series and 5 000 Forced master switching replacement is n
72. H PCF optical lt 25Mbps gt cable 1km SI optical cable 200m QSI optical cable 1km H PCF optical cable 400m Broad band H PCF optical cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km CRC X16 X 2 X5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken Use 10 Mbps when using SI A optical cable and HPCF optical cable Error control system cable tic function for checking local link li iagnostic func en ing ink lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Transient transmission Monitor program up download etc with peripheral device 1 1 communication Monitor program up download etc For comparison of dedicated link instruction refer to Section 5 6 2 Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 2 Performance comparison of AJ72LP25G and QJ72LP25G Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat 9595 Precautions for replacement ibility AJ72LP25G QJ72LP25G Maximum number LX LY 8192 points of link points LB 8192 points 16384 points network LW 8192 points 16384 points lt Remote station gt Remote station gt Maximum number of lin
73. I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 6 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK RAS function Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ71LR21 A1SJ71LR21 Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions QJ71BR11 Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Compat ibility Precautions for replacement The loopback function cannot be used on a coaxial bus system To use the loopback function using an optical loop system is recommended Transient transmission Monitor program up download etc with peripheral device Dedicated link instruction 1 1 communication Monitor program up download etc Dedicated link instruction For comparison of dedicated link instruction refer to Section 5 6 2 Number of occupied I O points 32 points per slot I O assignment special 32 points 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli 32 points 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 4 Performance comparison of AJ71BR11 A
74. MELSECNET H control station Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold Assignment method Points Start Start End 2 25 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC MELSECNET H normal station 1 network parameter setting The network parameter settings of MELSECNET H normal stations QO2HCPU are the same as those of MELSECNET H normal stations when replaced with the MELSECNET mode Refer to the MELSECNET mode 2 Station inherent parameter For the station inherent parameter settings settings of the same content as that for the control stations has to be set to all normal stations Refer to the station inherent parameters of the MELSECNET H control station Station inherent parameter MELSECNET H normal station Reference network range assignment Assignment method Drive Path EA to Q Points Start name Project Name QO6HCPU_a 1 Start End Switch LB settings screens Reference Read Cancel Setting Setting2 Network range assignment Station No A Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End 1 258 0000 00 256 0300 OsrF 512 0000 OFF Disable 2 moj 256 0200 02 a 258 oo 02 256 0400 o4rr 512 0300 O4FF Disable 3 Refresh parameters The same parameter set
75. Maximum Remote master station remote I O number of B station 8192 points link points remote I O station remote master per station 8192 points network 16384 points MELSECNETmode 1024 points Remote master station remote I O MELSECNET II composite mode station 8192 points 4096 points remote I O station remote master station 8192 points MELSECNETmode 1024 bytes Remote master station remote I O Maximum Master e MELSECNET composite mode number of station Link parameter first half 1024 bytes 8 2 7 p LY LB 8 2 x LW lt 1600 bytes n pos Remote Remote station remote master o ciim yo 512 bytes station station LX LB 8 2x LW 1600 bytes 6 12 4096 points points per station Communication 125kbps 250kbps 500kbps 1Mbps 2 speed 10Mbps 65 stations Remote master Set the PLC to PLC network to station 1 remote separate network Number of stations 32 stations Master station 1 O station 64 connected in one MAT local station remote station 31 33 stations Remote master Set the PLC to PLC network to station 1 remote separate network O station 32 SI optical cable H PCF optical cable A new optical cable has to be Bae E installed Applicable cable Shielded twisted pair cable H PCF optical cable QSI optical cable 3C 2V A new coa
76. NETWORK Can be used x Cannot be used Execution gt Target station station Multiplexed Multiplexed Instruction Name Description QnPH QnPRH remote remote master sub master station station Receives the channel data which was sent by SEND within an interrupt program and reads that data to the CPU device immediately Processing is completed when the instruction is executed Receive CPU Network module Network module CPU message pee ee RECVS x 1 Channel 1 Logical channel 1 Channel 1 completed O i Channel 2 Logical channel 2 Channel 2 i 1 scan HH seno H 1 Logical channel 3 Channel 3 1 Channel 4 Logical channel 4 Channel 4 Interrupt program it Channel 5 Logical channel 5 Channel 5 K i Channel 6 Logical channel 6 Channel 6 14 HH Recvs Channel 7 Logical channel 7 Channel 7 Channel 8 Logical channel 8 Channel 8 A compatible instruction Reads the CPU device data of the target station of the target network No CPU Network module Network module CPU Other station iE Word device ZNRD worddevice HH zo H4 2594 Word device 2594 n
77. O station m points Bi points o This is new function from M 8192 points A MELSECNET H 2048 points This is a new function from i MELSECNETIH points per remote EET lO D 12288 pointe This is a new function from MELSECNET H This is new function from SD 2048 points A MELSECNET H Communication speed 10Mbps ae Nothing to be noted though the Communication method Token ring method Token bus method A AE communication method differs Synchronous type Frame synchronization method coding Non Return Noting to be noted though the Encoding method Manchester code A i to Zero Inverted encoding methods are different The coaxial bus system cannot use the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus A Using the optical loop system is recommended for using the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission format HDLC standards frame format O Maximum number of 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and networks remote networks O Up to 32 stations are available 65 stations Remote 33 stations Remote as t e normal statlon of coaxial Number of stations ae S bus system master station 1 remote master station 1 remote connected in one network 4 5 Using the optical loop system is I O station 64 station 32 recommended for connecting 33 normal stations or more Applic
78. RITO Transient transmission to intelligent device station and local station is available using dedicated instructions Change the sequence program as instruction formats differ Send receive instruction SEND RECV READ SREAD WRITE SWRITE REQ Data sending receiving to from other station on CC Link is available Data reading writing from to other station is also available Replace READ WRITE instructions with dedicated instructions RIRD RIWT Other instruction cannot be replaced Remote net mode Communication is available for master station and remote I O station only Set parameters with GX Developer Temporary error invalid station specify function Module replacement is available without detecting error of the faulty remote station during online Online test function Line test and link start stop etc can be performed with GX Developer Monitoring and diagnostics 8 s Monitoring and diagnosing can be performed from GX Developer 9 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK 8 4 Switch Settings Comparisons 1 A AnS series Switch name Station number setting switch O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 Sets the station No of the module lt Setting range gt For remote net mode Master station 0 Local station 1 to 64 Standby master station 1 to 64 For remote I O net mo
79. S Remote master station gt 1600 bytes Maximum number of link remote station lt Multiplexed remote points per station LY LB 8 2 x LW S master station lt gt 9 1600 bytes multiplexed remote sub master station gt LY LB 8 2 x LW S 2000 bytes Communication speed 10Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to 255 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC Maximum number of cannot be set to PLC networks and to PLC networks and networks Alternate them with unused remote networks remote networks network Nos 65 stations Remote master 65 stations Remote master Number of stations j station 1 remote station 1 remote connected network 3 station 64 station 64 SI optical cable optical cable i Broad band H PCF optical cable O QSI optical cable Overall distance 30km 1 Remote master station gt remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 For the mu
80. Section 5 6 2 Number of occupied I O points 32 points per slot I O assignment special 32 points 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli 32 points 5 4 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 2 Performance comparison of AJ71LP21G and QJ71LP21G O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Pie Precautions for replacement AJ71LP21G QJ71LP21G ibility Maximum number LX LY 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points network LW 8192 points 16384 points lt Remote master station gt remote I O station LY LB 8 2 x LW Remote master station gt lt 1600 bytes Maximum number of link remote station lt Multiplexed remote points per station LY LB 8 2 x LW S master station lt gt 9 1600 bytes multiplexed remote sub master station gt LY LB 8 2 x LW S 2000 bytes Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to 255 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC Maximum number of cannot be set to PLC networks and to PLC networks and net
81. Sets the mode for operation loop test is set in GX Mode select switch A self diagnostics test self diagnostics test Developer network parameter settings 2 Comparison between MELSECNET B modules and MELSECNET H modules Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Compat Precautions for Switch name MELSECNET 1 module MELSECNET H module ibility replacement Station number settin 2 Sets the station number Sets the station number switch The forward loop reverse Sets the mode for operation Sets the mode for operation loop test is set in GX Mode select switch A self diagnostics test self diagnostics test Developer network parameter settings Communication speed EM T i Sets the communication speed A The setting is not required setting switch 3 11 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 5 Parameter Comparisons 3 5 1 1 Parameter comparisons The network parameters of MELSECNET are deleted when the programmable controller type is changed with the GX Developer After changing the programmable controller type set the MELSECNET H network parameters again MELSECNET gt MELSECNET H The following shows a comparison between MELSECNET 1 network parameter settings and MELSECNET H network parameter settings MELSECNET II master station is compared with the MEL
82. Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21 QJ71LP21 25 ibility replacement Maximum number X Y__ 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points network 8192 points 16384 points Remote master station gt Remote I O station 8 lt Maximum number of link 8 2 1600 bytes Multiplexed remote master station lt gt multiplexed remote O points per station sub master station gt Y B 8 2 x W S 2000 bytes Communication speed 10Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Maximum number of 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote networks networks O Number of stations 65 stations Remote master station 1 remote station connected in one network 64 3 SI optical cable H PCF optical cable i Broad band H PCF optical cable O QSI optical cable Overall distance 30km lt 10Mbps gt SI optical cable 500m H PCF optical cable 1km Broad band H PCF optical SI optical cable 500m cable 1km Distance between rode En QSI optical cable 1km i i i Broad band H PCF optical stations lt 25Mbps gt cable 1km SI optical cable 200m QSI optical cable 1km Use 10 Mbps when using SI H PCF optical ca
83. a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions NWARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used the system before mounting or removing module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction NCAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount a Q series module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction To mount an A AnS QnA QnAS module fully insert the module fixing projection s located in the lower part of the module into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place To fix an AnS
84. by only adding the QCPU stage All data relay is disabled due to restrictions on the TA number of send data per station Therefore reduce Modification on software O Section 6 4 relay data Program change according to the relay data is also required Only the QCPU is added to the MELSECNET 10 side The addition does not affect the system EM configuration of the existing MELSECNETV II Extensibility necessary replacing each station the MELSECNET II with the QCPU and changing the system to the MELSECNET 10 is possible 1 24 1 INTRODUCTION 1 25 Adding the QCPU using the MELSECNET local station data link module This method adds the QCPU without changing the existing MELSECNET II using local station data link module Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration Change the station number of ex L5 to L6 Added QCPU Mount the local station data link module to the QA1S6LIB and add the new L5 station Refer to Section 1 1 3 1 Advantage Outline Reference Data link is possible by only changing the laying of Cable Two tier optical loop coaxial loop and twisted pair cable i Section 7 1 1 laying system according to the added station without changing the existing network Connect the extension base unit QA1S60B to the Cost addition station and mount local station data link module on it
85. cable Automatic return function RAS function Slave station detach function Error detection with link special relay register GX Developer parameter Number of parameter te T _ settings are performed instead of the parameter E PROM T 2 registration to Number of occupied 32 points I O assignment 32 points assignment points special 32 points intelli 32 points 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 8 2 2 Cable performance comparisons CC Link dedicated cable used on the A AnS QnA QnAS series can be also used on the Q series For specifications of CC Link dedicated cable refer to CC Link Partner Association home page http www cc link org 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 1 A AnS series 8 3 Functional Comparisons O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N Precautions for replacement Communication between master station and remote I O station The communication of ON OFF information with remote I O station is performed Communication between master and remote device stations The communication of ON OFF information and numerical data with remote device station is performed Communication between master station and local station The communication of ON OFF information and numerical data with local station is performed Communication between master and intelligent
86. card error for OFF Normal OFF Normal M921 SB0020 Module stat 2 master station ON Abnormal cos ide ON Abnormal OFF Online ON Offline station OFF Online M9224 Link status to station test SB0043 Online switch ON Other than or self loopback online test When ON confirm the loop status by 5 0090 OFF Normal The loop status can 5 0090 Host 1 tat ie aa ON Abnormal o also be judged by the host station bits of SW0091 to SW0094 M9225 _ Forward loop error OFE om ON Abnormal SB0092 when host F dl tat station is SMS OFF Normal remote Abnormal master station master station to next page 2 63 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Special relay in the case of MELSECNET 11 master station Corresponding MELSECNETIH special relay Compat Precautions for Description Number Description ibility replacement When ON confirm the loop status by SW0090 OFF Normal The loop status can 5 0090 Host tat ON Abnormal o also be judged by the host station bits of OFF N SW0095 to 51 0098 M9226 Reverse loop error bs ON Abnormal 5 0096 when host Reverse loop station is status of the OFF Normal remote remote master ON Abnormal o master station station OFF Not being executed ON Forward loop Off
87. control station is in failure Multiplex transmission Performs high speed communication using duplex o function transmission channel forward loop reverse loop Treats the stations which are to be connected in the future as reserved stations Reserved station function e O By specifying the stations which are not connected as reserved stations communication error does not occur To next page 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series MELSECNET 10 module Q series MELSECNET H module Precautions for replacement Simple dual structured network Switches link data refresh target to the standby network to continue data link when break causes error in regular network Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Q00 Q01 Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Use QCPUs other than those above Using SB SW as user flag Sends desired control data to all stations using user flag status SWO1FO to SWO1F3 without using link device Change UFSET UFRST and UFOUT instructions to a sequence program that uses the link relay and link register RAS function Automatic return function Returns the station disconnected from data link to the System when it goes to normal status and restarts data link Loopback function Keeps normal operation between operable stations by disconnecting faulty area at error occ
88. device stations The communication is performed with intelligent device station using cyclic transmission and transient transmission Reserved station function By setting remote station and local station which are to be connected in the future as reserved stations these stations are not treated as data link faulty stations If a connected module is specified no data link is available Error invalid station function Remote station and local station that cannot perform data link due to the power supply off etc will not be treated as data link faulty stations with this function Data link status setting at master station programmable controller CPU error The data link status when operation continuation error occurs on the master station programmable controller CPU can be set Parameter registration to E7PROM Parameter writing is not required at each startup of master module by registering A parameters to E PROM of master module GX Developer parameter settings are performed instead of the parameter registration to E PROM Data link faulty station input data status setting The input received data status cleared hold from the station that has data link error caused by the power supply off etc can be set Module reset function by sequence program Resetting can be performed by the sequence program without resetting programmable controller CPU in the case the switch setting is c
89. error The data link status when operation continuation error occurs on the master station programmable controller CPU can be set Parameter registration to 2 Parameter writing is not required at each startup of master module by registering parameters to 2 of master module GX Developer parameter settings are performed instead of the parameter registration to 2 Data link faulty station input data status setting The input received data status cleared held from the station that has data link error caused by the power supply off etc can be set Module reset function by sequence program Resetting can be performed by the sequence program without resetting programmable controller CPU in the case the switch setting is changed or an error has occurred in a module When the switch setting is changed turn the power supply of programmable controller system OFF gt ON or reset the programmable controller CPU Data link stop restart The stop and restart of data link is available during the data link execution Automatic return function The module disconnected from data link by the power supply off etc can automatically return to data link when restored to the normal status Slave station detach function The module that cannot perform data link due to the power supply off etc is disconnected and data link is kept with normal modules only
90. external power supply terminal block and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Correctly solder coaxial cable connectors Incomplete soldering may result in malfunction Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit fire or malfunction When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal block screws Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction and damage to the module or cable Wiring Precautions Mitsubishi programmable con
91. fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS Print Date Handbook Number The handbook number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision Apr 2005 L NA 08048ENG A First edition Oct 2005 Oct 2006 Nov 2012 L NA 08048ENG B L NA 08048ENG C L NA 08048ENG D L NA 08048ENG E Addition Section 1 1 3 Section 2 5 3 Section 2 5 4 Appendix 1 Partial correction Contents Section 2 5 2 Section 2 7 Section 3 5 2 Appendix 1 gt 2 Chapter 6 Partial correction Section 1 3 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Addition Section 1 1 4 Chapter 7 Partial correction Section 1 1 3 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Revision on the new functions of the Universal model QCPU with a serial number first five digits is 13102 or later Model Addition QJ71NT11B MELSEC AnS QnAS series QA1S51B 5C FB Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 1 to 9 Appendix Japanese Handbook Version L 08047 K This handbook confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a
92. fum c BW network range assignment after addition of the gateway station L5 1Mp1 eae in the area of 200 to 3FF is W ae B W 0 100 6FF a E iret M second half L1 second half L5 second half alf al ONE data uc gt R EET data receiving area by receiving area by inter link data transfer inter link data transfer When the data is transferred from MELSECNET 10 to MELSECNET II B W260 to shall be the transfer area Note that only the data required for QCPU 1NS2 are transferred to MELSECNET lI 1FFF When the data is transferred from MELSECNET II to MELSECNET 10 B W1000 to 11FF shall be the transfer area Since all points cannot be transferred from MELSECNET II to MELSECNET 10 narrow down the data to be transferd by setting priorities 3 Network range assignment for MELSECNET 10 B W1000 1100 1200 1260 1300 MELSECNETV II data receiving area by inter link data transfer 4 Network parameter settings MELSECNET II composite master station The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET composite master station A3ACPU Network parameter settings A3ACPU MELSECNET II composite master station IMNET II comp Master station i Necessary setting setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded Nosetting Already set 2 Valid module Start No EA isin tensnission parameter Input the stat 70 No instaled in the
93. i 4096 points station 8192 points Salon remote master station 8192 points MELSECNET mode 1024 bytes Remote master station remote I O Maximum Master ei I composite mode _ station Augen rue link parameter first half 1024 bytes LY LB 8 2 LW lt 1600 bytes we Remote Remote station gt remote master station yo 512 bytes station station LX LB 8 2 x LW 1600 bytes Maximum 512 points 4096 points points per station ro RN 1 25 Mbps 10 Mbps Number of Set the PLC to PLC network stations 65 stations Master station 1 local 33 stations Remote master station 1 to a separate network connected in one station remote I O station 64 remote I O station 32 For stations over 33 build network separate network When using existing cables cane 3C 2V the overall distance and 5C 2V distance between stations becomes shorter Either use an 6 10 Overallidistance 3C 2V 10km 3C 2V 300m X A6BR10 DC type repeater 5C 2V 10km 5C 2V 500m unit or configure a separate network Distance between 3C 2V 500m 3C 2V 300m Mina stations 5C 2V 500m 5C 2V 500m the repeater unit Maximum number of _ 239 New MELSECNET H networks parameter mandatory Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method A 2 Transmission Duplex loop Single bus x Nothing to be noted though the method transmission method di
94. instruction and GX Developer etc LRDP instruction and LWTP instruction cannot be used Change them to ZNRD instruction ZNWR instruction READ instruction and WRITE instruction For comparison of dedicated link instruction refer to Section 4 6 2 Routing function Performs transient transmission to other stations of which network No are different Group function Performs transient transmission to all stations in the group with an instruction Control station shift Enables to continue data link by switching normal station function to sub control station even if control station is in failure Multiplex transmission Performs high speed communication using duplex function transmission channel forward loop reverse loop RAS function Automatic return function Returns the station disconnected from data link to the system when it goes to normal status and restarts data link Loopback function Keeps normal operation between operable stations by disconnecting faulty area at error occurrence such as cable break Station detach function Keeps normal operation between operable stations except faulty stations and stations switched off Diagnostic function Checks line conditions of the network and setting conditions of the module Set diagnostic items for station to station test and forward loop reverse loop test in GX Developer network parameters Data link statu
95. link data and avoid control program Common precautions 1 For a relay station use the AnU AnUS H QnA QnASCPU that supports MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 modules Modules other than those cannot serve as a relay station 2 Due to link refresh among the CPU module MELSECNET II module and MELSECNET 10 module on the relay station the scan time may be delayed or varied Using the CPU module only for link refresh processing is recommended 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH 6 4 Communication Between Existing ACPU in MELSECNET II and Added QCPU Data Transmission Reception by Inter link Data Transfer This section describes the method to perform data transmission reception between exsiting A AnSCPU in MELSECNET II and added QCPU by inter link data transfer using a gateway set 1 System configuration example a Configuration of the existing MELSECNET II An example of the existing system configuration is as follows master station M A3ACPU local station 1 L1 A2ACPU and local station 2 L2 A1SHCPU b Configuration after QCPU addition By newly adding the gateway station Q2ASCPU L3 1Mp1 to the above configuration 1 and connecting it to the QCPU 1Ns2 in MELSECNET 10 link data relay is performed between MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 MEET 3 1 1 MELSECNET 10 o Gateway set Gateway station 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH 2 Netwo
96. necessary to add terminal resistor AGRCON R75 sold separately 4 14 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 3 Functional Comparisons 1 A AnS series O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description A AnS series MELSECNET 10 module Q series MELSECNET H module Precautions for replacement Cyclic transfer function Communication using B W 1 N communication Performs communications with all stations using link relay and link register Communication using B W Communication using X Y 1 1 communication Performs communications between master station and the other station in pairs Communication using X Y Constant link scan function Keeps link scan time constant Data link stop restart function Stops cyclic transmission temporarily with GX Developer etc Inter link data transfer function Transfers link data to multiple networks using parameters all at once when multiple networks are connected to one programmable controller Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Use QCPUs other than those above Transient transmission function Transient transmission function Communicates only when communication requests are issued between each stations Communication using dedicated link
97. network 1 LB LW 0 100 180 200 280 380 400 500 580 600 680 Control station 1Mp3 Normal station 1Ns2 1Mp3 2Mp3 2 51 2Ns2 1Ns2 Empty 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 1Ns2 7 i Transferred by station Common inherent parameter parameters i LB LW Y FF Network1 2 Gateway station 1Ns1 2Mp3 CPU Common i parameters i LB LW 0 200 500 6FF MELSECNET H network 1 1Ns1 Normal station 1Ns1 1Mp3 1Ns2 gt 1 1 2Mp3 2 51 2Ns2 2Mp3 2 51 2Ns2 i Link 1 1 Link A KR NAT A irefresh 1 4 i 1 i Gateway station nter data transfer f ee e Common x parameters MN X i i MELSECNET H network 2 LB LW 0 100 180 280 300 1 400 4 Control station 2Mp3 i 1Mp3 2 3 1Mp3 2 3 i 7 2Ns1 2Ns2 i i 2Mp3 i Link refresh 1 Cyclic M communication Transferred 222 by refresh Common parameter parameters Y LB LW 0 300 400 4 2Mp3 MELSECNET H network 2 Normal station 2Ns1 Normal station 2Ns2 Station inherent nt Transferred by E Y i i inherent p
98. number of I O points up c Lay anne mates remote I O station a points m points O This is a new function from M 8192 points MELSECNET H Number Grdecice SM 2048 This is new function from vi i MELSECNETIH points per remote a 2 D 12288 points This is a new function from P MELSECNETIH This is new function from SD 2048 points A MELSECNET H Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote Maximum number of networks networks Number of stations connected 65 stations Remote master station 1 remote I O in one network station 64 4 Applicable cable optical cable Overall distance 30km Distance between stations GI optical cable 2km Error control system CRC X 6 x12 X5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable 2 Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS function M O Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up download etc with 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated
99. number of PLC to PLC networks and remote Maximum number of networks networks Number of stations connected 65 stations Remote master station 1 remote I O in one network station 64 4 SI optical cable H PCF optical cabl Applicable cable Broad band H PCF optical cable QSI optical cable Overall distance 30km lt 10Mbps gt SI optical cable 500m H PCF optical cable 1km Broad band H PCF optical SI optical cable 500m cable 1km H PCF optical cable 1km l QSI optical cable 1km Distance between stations Broad band H PCF optical lt 25Mbps gt cable 1km SI optical cable 200m 7 optical cable 1km Use 10 Mbps when using SI H PCF optical cable 400m optical cable and HPCF Broad band H PCF optical optical cable cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km Error control system 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over 1 Remote master station gt remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 8 When the X Y numbers are duplicate one side only is taken into consideration 4 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5
100. oO 5 How to transfer data a Transfer from MELSECNET II to MELSECNET 10 Write the data of MELSECNET II into the host station range of the gateway station 1Mp1 using the BMOV instruction Since all points cannot be transferred from MELSECNET II to MELSECNET 10 narrow down the data to be relayed by setting priorities Transfer from MELSECNET 10 to Write all data of MELSECNET 10 into the host station range of the gateway station L5 using the BMOV instruction Write all data to be used in the master station M A3ACPU local station 1 L1 A2ACPU and local station 2 L2 A1SHCPU into the first half LB LW of L5 Data cannot be used in the local station 2 L2 A1SHCPU which is imcompatible with MELSECNET Il can be transferred using the second half LB LW of L5 b 6 14 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH Sample program NET II gt NET 10 First Half Transmission sm400 0 BMOV BMOV BMOV NET II gt NET 10 Second Half Transmission smM400 37 BMOV gt 10 First Half Transmission smM400 70 11 gt 10 Second Half Transmission 400 107 11 10 gt NET II First Half Second half W Transmission SM400 140 BMOV BMOV NET 10 gt NET II First Half Second half B Transmission SM400 180 BMOV BMOV
101. of the AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU newly set network parameters a Optical loop system MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loo Optical loo P E The following item is provided in addition to common precautions 1 above When mixing with MELSECNET 10 o 2 modules for A AnS QnA QnAS series o set the MELSECNET 10 mode control station or MELSECNET 10 mode normal station as the network type b Coaxial bus system MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Coaxial bus Coaxial bus The following item is provided in addition to common precautions 1 above When mixing with MELSECNET 10 Network 1 Network 1 modules for A AnS QnA QnAS series set the MELSECNET 10 mode control Ga Ga 2 Ga station or MELSECNET 10 mode normal station as the network type 1 INTRODUCTION c Coaxial loop system MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H System configuration precautions The following item is provided in addition to common precautions 1 described on the previous page Overall distance If this value exceeds Coaxial loop the Q series specification value when Coaxial bus the MELSECNET 10 system cables are re used measures e g adding repeater unit are required Network 1 Number of stations When 64 modules are connected measures e g di
102. of the other stations from the local module First half Transfers data of the special relay for link from M9240 to the area starting from SM1240 Transfers data of the special register for H5 from D9243 to the area starting from SD1243 Obtains data of the special relay for link Obtains data of the special register for link Refresh completion Turns OFF the refresh in execution Turns OFF the refresh request Turns ON the refresh request Restores the relevant device data 7 6 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE 1 B AS THE LOCAL 2 Condition 2 Only for the MELSECNET II mode three tier system Number of mounted local station data link modules 1 Module mounting address X Y200 to 21F slot e Network type MELSECNET II mode Send range for each station setting Both first half and latter half set Master station for the third tier B W receive program Exists Program for receiving LRDP instruction Exists Program for receiving LWDP instruction Exists link Exists Refresh device bit BOO to FFF Refresh device word WOO to FFF Second tier Master station Q series programmable controller main base unit Qn lt Target QCPU for the sample program High Performance model QCPU 11 B B 7 Local station MELSECNET II mode B uu station data li
103. receive program None Program for receiving LRDP instruction None Program for receiving LWDP instruction None link None Refresh device bit BOO to 3FF e Refresh device word WOO to Master station Q series programmable controller main base unit Target QCPU for the sample program Local station MELSECNET mode 156 1 Local station data link module Local station 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE 1 B AS THE LOCAL SM400 MOV 70 MOV 71 MOV 22 X201 U20 BMOVP WO G1024 U20 G592 SET SET SM402 X207 SET U20 DMOV GO D2040 0 U20 DMOV G2 U20 BMOV wozo 6102420 502040 3 020 DMOV G8 MOV 20 5 22 020 4 070 0659272 7 5 502042 502043 502044 4096 256 DY210 DY216 D2040 DY211 D2040 20 71 20 22 K4 21 Saves the relevant device data in the save area When powered ON initializes B W devices Transfers W to the local module Transfers B to the local module RUN status Refresh request In refresh ready status starts refresh No refresh request Refresh in execution Obtains whether the refresh information table is present or not W device transmission First half Start No 20 No of words Z1 Transfers W of the host station to the local module First half
104. remote I O network 1Ns2 2MP4 3MnR is not allowed on the Q series the Network 2 Network network has to be divided into two networks having different network Nos For this reason a separate network module for the remote master station is required 4 New installation A separate optical cable is required for the remote I O stations 1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than that of MELSECNET II the distance between stations may become shorter 1 INTRODUCTION 2 Coaxial cable system a 2 tier system 1 System configuration example using local stations only MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H System configuration precautions 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables 3C 2V has to be changed to 5C 2V 2 Overall distance If this value exceeds the Coaxial loop Q series specification value when used measures e g adding a repeater i 1 Network unit are required 3 CPU When replacing an integrated type CPU new slot 32 points is required 4 Number of stations When 65 modules are connected measures e g dividing Coaxial bus MELSECNET II system cables are re into two or three networks of 32 modules or less having a different network No are required 5 Duplex loop When the transmission path has to be duplexed
105. retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS function pee Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated 1 aC download etc with Monitor program up nu Transient transmission link instruction refer to Section peripheral device Dedicated link instruction download etc Dedicated link instruction 5 6 2 1 Remote master station gt remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 When the X Y numbers are duplicate one side only is taken into consideration 4 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 3 Performance comparison of AJ72LR25 and QJ72BR15 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat IUE Precautions for replacement AJ72LR25 QJ72BR15 ibility Maximum number LX LY 8192 points
106. series and Forced master switching replacement is not applied 5 005 request acknowledgement Forced master switching 80050 request complete Execution status of remote 5 005 device station initialization procedure Completion status of remote 5 005 device station initialization procedure To next page 8 21 9 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK 8 22 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Name AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N Compat Precautions for replacement ibility The mode is set on the Q series using the network parameters 5 0069 Module mode A The setting be checked 0060 Setting status of block SBOO6F guarantee of cyclic data per station Master station return 5 0079 Pane specification information Added on the series and Host master standby master A SB007B replacement is not applied operation status Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting status SB007C o in case of programmable controller CPU STOP instruction 1 execution Not used on the Q series SBOOAO 1 eee request flag Delete the sequence program SBOOA instruction 2 execution of the section corresponding to request flag the function Standby master station test 5 00 4 result Transmission speed test result 5 0184 for standby master station Added on the Q series and
107. status station D9215 SW0087 D9216 Stores whether each D9217 station error local station has None Can be substituted by D9218 detection status detected any error in SW0074 to 5 0077 D9219 other station 09220 Local station Turns ON when a local SW007C D9221 parameter station or a remote I O SWO07D mismatch station has detected Stores the D9222 SW007E status of each parameter status of Remote station an error on the link station each station 09223 assignment parameters from the SW007F error master station 09224 stati SW0078 P2224 opr Stores stations that are Parameter Stores the D9225 station SW0079 A Mm initial performing communication communication p 4062 communication of link SWO007A status of each status of each communiaugn arameters station station parameters D9227 underway p SWO007B 09228 SW0074 59229 Local station Stores data link error SW0075 Cyclic transmission Stores ne cyclic remote station status of each transmission status D9230 stations SW0076 i error station of each station D9231 SW0077 D9232 SW0091 D9233 SWO0092 Forward loop status Stores the forward Wg error on the loop D9234 SWO093 of each stati n loop status of each line of the forward loop and Stores the station that station is stored D9235 3 detected the error on SW0094 remote station
108. system configuration example System configuration using local and remote stations optical MELSECNET II optical MELSECNETHH optical Remarks proposed measure Optical loo i P P Optical loop The control station of network No 1 configures a PLC to PLC network that Network Network controls normal station 1 and normal 4 1 4 2 station 2 other network module becomes the 2 remote master station and the remote I O network system of No 2 is configured 3 28 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 Sequence program 3 29 a Data separation prevention When two words 32 bits or more of cyclic data e g current value of the positioning module are handled the old data sometimes is mixed with the new data To read write cyclic data of two words or more in a single operation set data separation prevention by the per station block guarantee function By enabling the per station block guarantee function handshaking is performed between CPU modules and network modules to refresh the network and to enable data separation to be prevented in station units The per station block guarantee function is enabled when Secured data send and Secured data receive in the following parameters are set Enabling the per station block guarantee function is recommended MNET 10 H common parameters supple Constant scan ms Maximum No of returns t
109. the Faulty parts are detected by the Change the devices in the data of special relays M9200 to data of link special relays SBO Error detection sequence program Refer 9255 and special registers to 1FF and link special registers to Section 2 6 2 D9200 to 9255 SWO to 1FF Set the following test items by the mode setting switch Set the following test items by Self loopback test Set the station to station the mode setting switch Internal self loopback test test forward loop Self diagnosis test Self loopback test Hardware test reverse loop test in the function Station to station test Forward loop reverse loop test Set the following test items in the network parameters Station to station test Forward loop reverse loop test network parameter settings 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 4 Switch Settings Comparisons 1 Comparison between MELSECNET modules MELSECNETIH optical loop and coaxial bus modules Switch name O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Compat Precautions for Station number MELSECNET Il module MELSECNET H module ibility replacement Sets the station number Sets the station number setting switch Set the station to station test and forward loop Sets the mode for operation S
110. the automatic refresh setting with GX Developer or read write cyclic data with FROM TO instruction 54 Parameter setting of Q series CC Link modules Parameters can be set on up to eight modules using GX Developer For the settings of the 9th module or later use the dedicated instruction For details refer to the CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 2 Delete the program for the network parameter setting of the existing module Perform the automatic refresh setting with GX Developer or read write cyclic data with FROM TO instruction Set the automatic refresh with GX Developer or read write cyclic data with FROM TO instruction When setting the network parameter with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction read write cyclic data with FROM TO instruction 8 11 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 8 6 Program Comparisons 8 6 1 Comparison of I O signals 1 A AnS series a Input signal O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Signal name Compat Input signal 2 Precautions for replacement AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility 0 Module error Module error 1 Data link status at host station Data link status at host station Delete the sequence program of the section Xn2 Parameter setting status Prohibited to use A corresponding to the function and check with SBOO6D Parameter setting status Xn3 Data l
111. the extension method when repeater unit for the AGBR10 A6BR10 DC type MELSECNET 10 coaxial bus system is used For details refer to the Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET 10 Coaxial Bus System type A6BR10 A6BR10 DC User s Manual IB 66499 1 The distance between stations of 500m 5C 2V and 300m 3C 2V be extended 500m 5C 2V 300m 3C 2V CPU BR BR QJ71BR11 R Terminal k gt resistor T 500m 5C 2V 300m 3C 2V 2 Up to four repeater units can be used in a single network 5 The overall distance can be extended to a maximum distance of 2 5 km Max 2 5km 5 It is necessary to add terminal resistor AGRCON R75 sold separately 3 9 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 3 Functional Comparisons O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description MELSECNET Il module MELSECNET B module X Y are used to perform 1 1 communications between the MELSECNET H module X Y are used to perform 1 1 communications between the Precautions for replacement Compat ibility Cyclic transmission master station and local remote master station and stations and the master station remote I O stations and remote I O stations REMFR REMTO RFRP RTOP instructions instructions issued from the issued fro
112. them to REMFR instruction and REMTO instruction Specification of default network Transient transmission function Processes the requests that cannot specify network No of access path Clock setup for stations on network with peripheral device Performs clock setup to CPU modules connected to the network with GX Developer Multiplex transmission function Performs high speed communication using duplex transmission path forward loop reverse loop Reserved station function Treats the stations which are to be connected in the future as reserved stations By specifying the stations which are not connected as reserved stations communication error does not occur Multiplex master system Allows the remote sub master station to automatically control the remote stations the case of the multiplexed remote master station failure function is available only when mounted on Q12PH Q25PH Q12PRH Q25PRH CPU multiplexed remote master station and the multiplexed remote sub master station cannot be mounted on the same programmable controller CPU Mount on separate programmable controller CPU Parallel master system Sets two remote master stations in the same network Cannot be configured on the remote network of MELSECNET H Configure two networks Settings of remote I O station output status in the case of system failure with programmable c
113. time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS function don Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated n 95 download etc with Monitor program up Transient transmission A link instruction refer to Section peripheral device Dedicated link instruction download etc Dedicated link instruction 5 6 2 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 When the X Y numbers are duplicate one side only is taken into consideration 4 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 32 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 14 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 2 QnA QnAS series a Performance comparison of remote master stations 1 Performance comparison between AJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21 and QJ71LP21 25 5 15 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible
114. to 5C 2V 1 Coaxial bus 2 Overall distance If this value exceeds the Q series specification value when MELSECNET II system cables re Qu Network 1 used measures e g adding a repeater N unit are required 1 51 1Ns2 2Mn 1Ns3 gt 3 CPU When replacing an integrated type Network 2 CPU one new slot 32 points is required 4 Number of stations When 65 modules 2R1 gt 2R3 are connected measures e g dividing 2 into two or three networks of 32 modules orless having a different network No are required 5 Duplex loop When the transmission path has to be duplexed changes to an optical loop system etc are required 1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than MELSECNET II and as the transmission method is different the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter 1 INTRODUCTION f 3 tier system 3 System configuration example using local stations remote I O stations MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H System configuration precautions 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables 3C 2V has to be changed to 5C 2v 2 Overall distance If this value exceeds the Q series specification value when Coaxial Bus MELSECNET II system cables re used measures e g adding repeater 1 4 unit
115. to SW0017 ao station to be initialized The specifications of A AnS Master station switch data link Refresh instruction at standby 510043 uM series and Q series are the start result master switching result same Automatic CC Link startup SW0052 execution result SWO0058 Detailed LED display status SWO0059 Transmission rate settin 9 Added the Q series and Forced master switching SWO005D replacement is not applied instruction result Remote device station SWO005F initialization procedure registration instruction result s On the Q series parameter SW0062 Condition setting switch status Module operating status setting status is stored SWO00B9 E PROM registration status SWOOBA E PROM erasure result 2 No E PROM Refer to Section Number of times when 3 87 SWOOBB parameters can be registered UC to E7PROM Remote device station initialization procedure SWO0110 to SWO11F registration execution individual information target 1 to 16 Compatible CC Link Ver SWO0140 to SW0143 information Added the series and CC Link Ver replacement is not applied SW0144 to SW0147 installation parameter matching status SWO0148 Parameter mode SWO0149 Host parameter mode SWO0183 Transmission speed test result Transmission speed test result SW0184 to SW0187 for each station 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 2 QnA QnAS series The following table shows
116. used LRDP instruction OFF Not accepted sequence program M92 N 09 received ON Accepted Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions Delete when used a M9201 LRDP instruction OFF Not completed Non _ _ sequence program complete ON Completed Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions Delete when used in a LWTP instruction OFF Not accepted sequence program M9202 N received ON Accepted one Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions Delete when used a M9203 LWTP instruction OFF Not completed Nona _ d sequence program complete ON Completed Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions OFF Parameter Link parameter OFF Normal Receive parameter normal M92 06 error in the host ON Abnormal pee error ON Parameter o abnormal Delete when used in a Link parameter OFF Match sequence program as a M9207 N 0 check results ON Mismatch 3 tier system cannot be configured Master station B W OFF Transmits to Delete when used in a M9208 transmission range tier2 and tier3 _ sequence program as a setting only master ON Transmits to 3 tier system cannot be station of lower link tier2 only configured Check instructions OFF Executing the Delete when used in a M9209 of link parameters check function None _ A sequence program as a only master station ON Check non 3 tier system cannot be of lower link execution configured Link
117. value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables optical cables etc has to be changed CPU When replacing from an integrated type CPU one new slot 32 points is required Number of stations When 65 modules are connected measures e g dividing into two networks of 64 modules or less having a different network No are required 1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than that of MELSECNET II the distance between stations may become shorter b 2 tier system 2 System configuration example using remote stations only MELSECNET II Optical loop x Optical loop MELSECNET H 1 System configuration precautions Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables optical cables etc has to be changed CPU When replacing from an integrated type CPU one new slot 32 points is required 4 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than that of MELSECNET II the distance between stations may become shorter 1 INTRODUCTION c 2 tier system 3 System configuration example using local stations remote I O stations MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H System configuration precautions 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables optical cables etc has to
118. 0500 067 768 0200 _O4FF 2 255 0280 037 25 0680 077 512 0500 3 258 000 256 0400 O4FF 512 000 OFF 2 53 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Refresh parameter QQ2HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 0000 O1FF 0000 0000 7 F 0000 OF7F 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC g MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 gateway station For data transfer between MELSECNET H networks 1 and 2 change the setting of MELSECNET II 2 and 3 tier by Assigning LB LW of network 2 control station 2Mp3 including LB LW size of network 1 control station 1Mp3 by the setting of Network range assignment Common parameters on network 2 control station 2Mp3 Transferring the data between networks 1 and 2 by the setting of Interlink transmission parameters between gateway stations 1Ns1 and 2Mp3 MELSECNET H network 1 MELSECNET H network 2 Normal station 1Ns1 Control station 2Mp3 mc E mE LIE EE 200 280 300 380 400 480 500 6FF 1FFF 5 Inter link data transfer from module 1 to 2 Inter link data transfer from module 2 to 1 2 55 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC For MELSECNET H normal station 1Ns1 that is gateway station change the settings of MELSECNET II 2 tier first half second half se
119. 192 points 4096 points remote I O station remote master station 8192 points MELSECNET Mode 1024 bytes Remote master station remote I O Maximum Master MELSECNET II composite mode station numberof station link parameter First half 1024 bytes e lt link points link parameter Second half 1024 bytes LY LB 8 2 x LW 1600 bytes Remote Remote I O station remote master station VO 512 bytes station station LX LB 8 2 x LW 1600 bytes Maxi ber of mU 512 points 4096 points points per station Communication 1 25 Mbps 10 Mbps speed P Number of stations i 65 stations Master station 1 local 65 stations Remote master station 1 Set the PLC to PLC network to DUDAS station remote I O station 64 remote station 64 separate network network Applicable cable Gl optical cable optical cable Overall distance 10 km 30 km Distance betwi GI optical cable 2km GI optical cable 2km stations Maximum number of 239 New MELSECNET H networks A parameter mandatory Communicati Nothing to b ted though th Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method A oug E method communication method differs Transmission method P P Modulation method Nothing to be noted though the Modulat thod CMI method Encod thod NRZI cod Encoding method memo Engoding method roang A modulation method differs Tr
120. 192 points w MELSECNET mode MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET H extended mode 4096 points 16384 points MELSECNET 10 mode When the number of bytes MELSECNET mode 1024 bytes MELSECNET H mode exceeds 2000 mount two Maman number MELSECNET II mode LY LB 8 2 lt 2000 bytes modules having the same of link points per MELSECNET II composite mode A network No or set all modules MELSECNET H extended mode station First half 1024 bytes lt the network the Second half 1024 bytes Bor LB 8 2 x LW 35840 MELSECNET H extended bytes mode mmunication Communicat 1 25Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps Set the remote I O network Number of stations t t twork Aum din D 65 stations master station 1 64 stations 22 2 local station remote I O station 64 control station 1 normal station 63 A network configure a separate network SI optical cable When using existing SI cables SI optical cable H PCF optical cable the distance between stations Applicable cable optical cable Broad band H PCF optical cable may be shortened Refer to optical cable Section 2 2 2 Overall distance 10km 30km To ensure the same distance 2 as before replacement either Distance betw sai CAD Refer to Section 2 2 2 Refer to Section 2 2 2 change the optical cable or install a gateway station midway along existing cables
121. 1AT21B QJ71LP21 25 Optical loop Twisted pair A1SJ71AT21B QJ71BR11 Coaxial bus AJ72T25B QJ72LP25 25 Optical loop Twisted pair 15 72 25 QJ72BR15 Coaxial bus 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons 3 2 1 Module performance Compatibility comparisons 1 Comparison between MELSECNET module optical loop and MELSECNET H module optical loop 3 3 a SI optical cable H PCF optical cable O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET module MELSECNET H module Optical loop Optical loop QJ71LP21 25 QJ72LP25 25 Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Max 2048 points and max number of X Y I O points of CPU module on master 8192 points station Maximum 16384 points number of B Remote master station remote link points station 8192 points remote I O station gt remote master station 8192 points network 16384 point station remote MELSECNET II composite mode station 8192 points remote I O station gt 4096 points remote master station 8192 points MELSECNET mode 1024 bytes Remote master station remote I O Maximum Master MELSECNET II composite mode station ae First half 1024 bytes L
122. 1SJ71BR11 and QJ71BR11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for replacement AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11 QJ71BR11 ibility Maximum number LX LY__ 8192 points of link points LB 8192 points 16384 points network LW 8192 points 16384 points lt Remote master station gt Remote station gt 2 LY LB 8 2 x LW S Remote master station gt 1600 bytes Maximum number of link remote station lt Multiplexed remote points per station LY LB 8 2 x LW S master station lt gt 2 1600 bytes multiplexed remote sub master station gt LY LB 8 2 x LW S 2000 bytes Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token bus method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method Manchester code O Transmission method Single bus Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to 255 4 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC Maximum number of cannot be set to PLC networks and to PLC networks and networks Alternate them with unused remote I O networks remote I O networks network Nos 33 stations Remote master 33 stations Remote master Number of stations station 1 remote I O station 1 remote I O connected network 3 station 32 station 32 Applicable cable dd i pu
123. 2 ra changed for an optical loop system or a coaxial bus system am ra A PLC to PLC network can be changed to a twisted bus system and a remote Coaxial BUS network can be changed to an optical loop or 9 o coaxial bus system refer to c r1 r2 Network 1 vad 1 1 1Ns2 2MR NA Network 2 f 3 tier system 3 System configuration example using local stations remote stations MELSECNET B MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loop 1 New installation The installation has to be changed for an optical loop system or coaxial bus system APLC to PLC network can be changed to Network 1 a twisted bus system and a remote network can be changed to an optical Twisted 1Ns2 2MPA 3MR loop or coaxial bus system refer to c Network 2 2 Composite system As a mixture of a PLC L1 L2 m L3 to PLC network and a remote network ial b pagas is not allowed on the Q series the By processing the terminals the existing cables can be used for the twisted bus network has to be divided into two Network 1 networks having different network Nos For this reason a separate network module for the remote master station is required Network 2 Network 3 3 Wire saving Changing to a wire
124. 201 10ms Tea ave Switch screens Second half LB LW settin 0300 O3FF 0300 O3FF EN RUN EN 8 2 23 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC b QO6HCPU control station Each of the MELSECNET II first and second half settings correspond to Setting1 and Setting2 set according to the Station inherent parameters on MELSECNET H Points when replacing the first and second half of MELSECNET II MELSECNET sequence programs can be re used more efficiently by using the station inherent parameters of MELSECNET H The followings describe the points when setting station inherent parameters Set station inherent parameters to all stations As the station inherent parameter setting functions cannot be used on basic models Q00JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU use the Device block replacement function to change the devices in the first and second half settings to continuous numbers 1 Network parameter The network parameter settings of the MELSECNET H control station QO6HCPU are the same as the parameters when replaced with the MELSECNET mode network parameter setting MELSECNET H control station Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Network type MNET H made Control station None None None Starting 1 0 No 0000 Network No 1 Total stations 3 Group No 0 Station No Mode n line X X X Network range assign
125. 4 70 22 K4 71 DY211 DY216 DY216 20 71 22 B device reception Latter half Start No 20 No of words 21 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Obtains B of the master station from the local module Latter half Refresh completion Turns OFF the refresh in execution Turns OFF the refresh request Turns ON the refresh request Restores the relevant device data 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK 8 1 List of CC Link Alternative Models 1 Replacement of the A AnS series series Alternative models AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N 2 Replacement of the QnA QnAS series QnA QnAS series Alternative models AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N 4 The number of mountable CC Link modules depending on Q series CPU module type is as follows Basic model QCPU 2 High Performance model QCPU 64 Universal model QCPU 64 Up to eight modules can be set using the parameter of GX Developer To use more than eight modules set the parameter using dedicated instructions For details refer to the CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 8 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons 1 A AnS series 8 2 1 Module performance comparisons Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N Compat ibility Precautions for replacement
126. 4 x d lt 64 a Number of 1 station occupied modules b Number of 2 station occupied modules Max number of stations Number of 3 station occupied modules For master station d Number of 4 station occupied modules O 16 x A 54 x B 88 x 2304 A Number of remote stations lt 64 stations B Number of remote device stations lt 42 stations C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 stations Number of occupied 1 to 4 stations Switched with 104 stations Switched with GX Developer parameter GX parameter DIP switch settings are required For local station settings NEI MR ROBORE IRR Remote APA RY 2048 points f Remote register RWw 256 points points per system Remote register RWr 256 points Remote station local Remote 32 points Local station 30 points station Remote register RWw 4 points Link points per station Remote register RWr 4 points Communication method Broad cast polling method Nothing to be noted Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Flag synchronization method A though the methods are different Encoding method NRZI method Transmission method Bus RS 485 Transmission format HDLC standards Error control system CRC X16 X12 X5 1 CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated
127. 500m H PCF optical cable 1km Broad band H PCF optical SI optical cable 500m cable 1km Distance between BEE CP optical canle IKM QSI optical cable 1km i i i Broad band H PCF optical B stations lt 25Mbps gt cable 1km SI optical cable 200m optical cable 1km Use 10 Mbps when using SI H PCF optical cable 400m optical cable and H PCF Broad band H PCF optical optical cable cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km Error control system CRC 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS function Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up download etc with 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated 9 peripheral device Monitor program up Transient transmission link instruction refer to Intelligent function modules applicable Dedicated link instruction download etc Dedicated link instruction Section 5 6 2 1 Remote master station gt remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points To next page 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 For the multi
128. A The number of empty slots etc is set PLC RAS setting PLC New parameter of MELSECNET H A The operation mode and error check at an error are set parameters Operation setting New parameter of MELSECNET H A The parameters for transmitting between devices are set I O assignment setting New parameter of MELSECNET H A The I O assignment of remote I O station etc is set Ethernet Network New parameter of MELSECNET H The network parameter of Ethernet module mounted on the remote I O station is set parameter CC Link New parameter of MELSECNET H The network parameter of CC Link module mounted on the remote I O station is set Remote password E Remote password setting w 5 45 New parameter of MELSECNET H The remote password of Ethernet A module and serial communication module etc mounted on the remote station is set 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 6 Program Comparisons 5 6 1 Comparison of link special relay SB link special register SW The table below shows only link special relay SB and link special register SW to be used in interlock program The following device name and device No are described in link device of internal MELSECNET 10 or MELSECNET H module Changing sequence program should be performed after checking the refreshed device of link device in refresh parameters 1 A AnS seri
129. A Using the optical loop system in one network station 63 station 31 is recommended for connecting 32 normal stations or more Applicable cable wy i i 5C 2V Using the optical loop system 3C 2V 19 2km 3C 2V 300m or A6BR10 A6BR10 DC Overall distance A 5C 2V 30km 5C 2V 500m repeater unit is recommended Distance between stations B Wi 5C 2V 500m O Error control system CRC X6 X12 X5 1 and retry by a time over 4 10 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK Specifications AJ71QLR21 A1SJ71QLR21 QJ71BR11 MELSECNET 10 mode Precautions for replacement Compat ibility Loop back function due to error detection or Diagnostic function for broken cable de checking local link lines Diagnostic function for Hl Prevention of system checking local link lines AA The loopback function cannot 7 down switching the Prevention of system be used on a coaxial bus down by switching the control Station system w witchi RAS function y 9 Abnormal detection A y control station ER To use the loopback function using link special relays Abnormal detection using an optical loop system does link special registers using link special relays is recommended Network monitoring and and link special registers MEN various diagnostic Network monitoring and fu
130. ACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 QOGHCPU 1 Network parameter setting 6 MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Network type MNET H mode Normal station mode Control station None None Starting 1 0 No 0000 20 E No Total tations Group No 4 47 7 Staton No np vi Ee Mode Refresh parameters _ Refeshpsamtes 222 Interrupt settings Interrupt settings Retum as control station Opteal coarial EN eer p lo In m H X 4 gt 2 Refresh parameter QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 Assignment method Points Start Start End Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold Dev name Points Stat End TransferSB 8 0000 TransferSw sw 52 00 512 0000 Random LB 3 Network range assignment QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H network 2 control station 2Mp3 Setup common and Station inherent parameters Assignment method Ponis Stat Monitoring time 200 x10m
131. Alternate them with unused remote networks remote networks network Nos Up to 32 stations are available as the normal station of coaxial 65 stations Remote master 33 stations Remote master bus system Number of stations A station 1 remote I O station 1 remote A Using the optical loop system connected in one network station 64 station 32 4 is recommended for connecting 33 normal stations or more Applicable cable ied i ii 5C 2V Using th tical t Overall distance 2 ce T V i 5C 2V 30km 5C 2V 500m ie repeater unit is recommended To next page 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 When the X Y numbers are duplicate one side only is taken into consideration 4 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 32 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 12 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 13 Distance between stations Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ72LR25 3C 2V 300m 5C 2V 500m QJ72BR15 Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Error cont
132. B 8 2 x LW 1600 bytes ink points per Remote Remote I O station remote master 512 bytes station station LX LB 8 2 x LW S 1600 bytes Maximum number of 512 point 4096 point points per station pom 1 25 Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps speed R P Number of stations connected one 65 stations Master station 1 local 65 stations Remote master station 1 Set the PLC to PLC network to station remote I O station 64 remote station 64 a separate network network SI optical cable When using existing SI cables SI optical cable H PCF optical cable the distance between stations Applicable cable H PCF optical cable Broad band H PCF optical cable may be shortened QSI optical cable Refer to Section 3 2 2 Overall distance 10km 30km ensure the same distance DISCO DONEC as before replacement either SERRE Refer to Section 3 2 2 Refer to Section 3 2 2 change the optical cable or install a gateway station midway along existing cables Maximum number of 239 New MELSECNET H networks parameter mandatory ommunicati Nothing to b ted though th Mp Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method M D M ii method communication method differs Transmission method Modulation method Nothing to be noted though the Modulat thod CMI method Encod thod NRZI cod Dg Modulation method CMI metho Encoding meine se
133. Bank 2 H H FFFH Y n 1 C OFF Y n 1 C ON Y n 1 C OFF Y n 1 D OFF Y n 1 D OFF Y n 1 D ON 2 8 16 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 2 QnA QnAS series Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Buffer memory name AJ61QBT11 Buffer memory address Compat Precautions for replacement ibility QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 OH to 0 to 95 information Em information 60H to 7FH 96 to 127 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use 80H to CDH 12810205 oo information information Parameter information Added with the remote net Ver 2 to DFH 206 to 223 Prohibited to use area A mode Replacement is not applied to 15FH 224 to 351 Remote input RX Remote input RX 160 to 1DFH 352 to 479 Remote output RY Remote output RY 1E0H to 2DFH 480 to 735 Remote register RWw Remote register RWw 2 to 3DFH 736 to 991 Remote register RWr Remote register RWr Slave station offset size Added with the remote net Ver 2 3E0H to 5DFH 992 to 1503 Prohibited to use i mode information Replacement is not applied to SFFH 1504 to 1535 Link special relay SB Link special relay SB 600 to 7FFH 1536 to 2047 Link special register SW Link special register SW 800 to 9FFH 2048 to 2559 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use 00 to
134. CNET H module ibility replacement Coaxial bus Coaxial loop Coaxial bus 3C 2V 300m 19 2km 300m A HReferto below 5C 2V 500m 30km 500m Refer to below When the overall distance does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications either use AGBR10 A6BR10 DC type repeater unit in the network or configure a separate network b Distance between stations Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications A AnS QnA QnAS series Q series Compat Precautions for MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module ibility replacement Coaxial bus Coaxial loop Coaxial bus 3C 2V 300m 300m 300m 5C 2V 500m 500m 500m 4 13 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK Remarks ccc eco The following shows the extension method when a repeater unit for the AGBR10 AGBR10 DC type MELSECNET 10 coaxial bus system is used For details refer to the Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET 10 Coaxial Bus System type AGBR10 A6BR10 DC User s Manual IB 66499 1 The distance between stations of 500m 5C 2V and 300m 3C 2V can be extended 500m 5C 2V 300m 3C 2V Max QJ71BR11 RF JH R Terminal resistor Max 200m 5C 2V 300m 3C 2V 2 Up to four repeater units can be used in a single network 2 The overall distance can be extended to a maximum distance of 2 5 km lt gt 2 5 2 It is
135. CNET II MELSECNET sequence programs can be re used more efficiently by using the station inherent parameters of MELSECNET H The followings describe the points when setting station inherent parameters Set station inherent parameters to all stations the station inherent parameter setting functions cannot be used on basic models Q00JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU use the Device block replacement function to change the devices in the first and second half settings to continuous numbers 1 Network parameter The network parameter settings of the MELSECNET H control station QO6HCPU are the same as the parameters when replaced with the MELSECNET mode Network parameter setting QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H control station Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 ES Network type mode Control station Noe None Starting 1 0 No Network No Total stations Group No Station No Mode On line gt es E Network range assignment Interupt settings p _ n gt umen EES 2 Network range assignment parameter Set the total number of points in the first half and second half for the common parameters Network range assignment 6 MELSECNET H control station Setup common and Station inherent parameters Assignment met
136. D X n 1 E 1 8 12 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK b Output signal Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Signal name Compat Output signal Precautions for replacement AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility Refreshed automatically Delete the sequence 0 Refresh specification Prohibited to use A program of the section corresponding to the function Yn1 Yn2 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Delete the sequence program of the section corresponding to the function Yn4 Module reset request Prohibited to use x When the switch setting is changed turn the power supply of programmable controller system OFF gt ON or reset the programmable controller CPU 5 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Delete the sequence program of the section Data link startup request from corresponding to the function and set parameters Yn6 Prohibited buffer memory parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction Yn7 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Delete the sequence program of the section m Data link startup request from Bened ER corresponding to the function and set parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction E2PROM parameters 9 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Delete the sequence program of the section Parameter registration request to corre
137. ELSECNET II master station Module No 1 Module No 2 Module No 3 Module No 4 Network type MNET II Master station Start 1 0 No Network No Total stations Group No Station No n Necessary setting setting Already set Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Start No 7 E I Input the start 1 0 No installed in the module in 16 point unit Acknowledge XY assignment Routit End Cancel 2 Network range assignment MELSECNET II master station Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End Switch screens LB LW settings Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Monitoring time 200 10 First half LB First half Lw Second half LB Second half L w Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat MO 255 000 DOFF 0000 ODFF 0800 0800 0100 O1FF 0100 IL 1 256 2 0300 osrr 258 0900 IL 2 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC b MELSECNET H control station Each of the MELSECNET first and second half settings correspond to Setting1 and Setting2 set according to the Station inherent parameters on MELSECNET H Points when replacing the first and second half of MELSE
138. EPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET II AND MELSECNETIB PLC TO PLC NETWORK 2 1 List of MELSECNET 1 MELSECNET B Alternative Models 1 Replacement of MELSECNET modules with MELSECNET H modules Network type Optical loop CPU integrated type A AnS A0J2 H series A1NCPUP21 Alternative models for Q series A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUP21 S1 A3NCPUP21 A2ACPUP21 CPU module QJ71LP21 25 Optical loop SI cable A2ACPUP21 S1 supported A3ACPUP21 A2CCPUP21 A0J2HCPUP21 Optical loop CPU integrated type A1NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 S4 A3NCPUP21 S3 CPU module QJ71LP21G Optical loop GI cable A2ACPUP21 S3 supported A2ACPUP21 S4 A3ACPUP21 S3 Coaxial loop CPU integrated type A1NCPUR21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPUR21 S1 A3NCPUR21 A2ACPUR21 CPU module QJ71BR11 Coaxial bus A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPUR21 A2CCPUR21 A0J2HCPUR21 Optical loop Standalone AJ71AP21 A1SJ71AP21 QJ71LP21 25 Optical loop SI cable supported Optical loop Standalone Coaxial loop Standalone AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71P22 S3 AJ71AP22 S3 QJ71LP21G Optical loop GI cable supported A1SJ71AP21 S3 AJ71AR21 A1SJ71AR21 QJ71BR11 Coaxial bus 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 Replacement of MELSECNET B modules with MELSECNET H modules Networ
139. ET 10 Controlling station 0m Necessary setting No setting Already set Setifitismeeded No setting Already Valid module Start No ame E Interlink transmission parameter Input the start No installed in the module 16 point unit Acknowledge assignment Routing parameters End Network range assignment BW settings Q2ASCPU L5 1Mp1 Setup common and station inherent parameters Assignment method n Points Start SMW Start End a 2 Switch screens setting 1000 TIFF 1000 TIFF J 1200 12FF 1200 12FF rum EGRE meme 6 13 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH Module 1 MELSECNET local station refresh parameter Assignment method Points Start Start End Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold PLC side Pons 5 End End B transmission 1792 0000 OEFF 0000 DEFF W transmission 1792 0001 O6FF 1792 0000 XZY transmission 2048 0000 OFFF Module 2 MELSECNET 10 control station refresh parameter Assignment method Points Start Start End Ph T PLC side Ponts Stat End B transmission 1000 Transient transmission error history status wverwrite Hold W transmission 1000 22 X transmission Y transmission
140. ET 10 module MELSECNET H module Performs communications with the I O module of the remote I O station using X Y LX LY Precautions for replacement Communicating with special function module Performs communications with the special function module of the remote I O station using X Y LX LY and B W LB LW Cyclic transmission Stops cyclic transmission temporarily with GX Developer stop restart etc Direct access to the Reads writes directly from to link device of the network link devices module on the sequence program Default of network refresh parameter Eliminates the refresh parameters setting by using default values of refresh parameters To next page 5 32 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 33 Transient transmission function O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series Q series MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module Communicates only when communication requests are issued between each stations Communication using dedicated link instruction and GX Developer etc Precautions for replacement Routing function Performs transient transmission to other stations of which network No are different Dedicated link instruction Performs communications with other station at desired timing using dedicated link instruction ZNFR instruction and ZNTO instruction cannot be used Change
141. F Normal OFF Normal The loop status can M9242 580090 Host tat ird ON Abnormal ON Abnormal also be judged by the host station bits of SW0095 to 5 0098 When ON confirm the tatus by 5 0090 OFF Loopback not bb Loopback executed OFF Normal ban statuscan M9243 uin ON Loopback SB0090 Host loop status ON Abnormal also be judged by d i whether SW0099 and xps SWO09A are the host station No Delete when used in a M9246 Data not received OFF None sequence program as a from master station Not received 3 tier system cannot be configured Delete when used Data not received from the upper loo OFF Received None sequence program as a ER Not received A 3 tier system cannot be in 3 tier system configured Parameter OFF Received Parameter receive OFE Receive M9250 80054 completed unreceived ON Not received status i ON Not received OFF Normal Host station data OFF Normal Link break ON Cancel ne link status ON Abnormal OFF Not being executed ON Forward loop Offline testing OFF No response M9252 Loop test status test reverse SBOOAE response ON Response loop test designation execution underway to next page 2 65 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 66 Special relay in the case of MELSECNET Il local station Description
142. For details refer to Section 3 7 Replacement Precautions 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 5 2 Parameter change example The following shows an example of how to change the LB LW LX LY network parameters when replacing the MELSECNET remote system with MELSECNET H The MELSECNET remote system can be used in the following operation modes MELSECNET mode MELSECNET composite mode 1 MELSECNET mode The following shows the procedure for changing the parameters in the case of a MELSECNET mode 2 tier system configuration A MELSECNET composite system comprising local stations and remote stations is divided into a PLC to PLC network and a remote network in the MELSECNET H MELSECNET MELSECNET H Optical loop Optical loop A3ACPU QO6HCPU MS c MELSECNET mode 2 tier system configuration example Master station Remote station Local station Local station Remote station xo x70 No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 X50 XO X20Y30 50 70 80 xo x70 xo X70 X70 e e e e e Input module 9 Input module Input module Output module 383 aes fe Input module Input module Ld eee Output module Input module Input module Output module Output module Input module xiF 5 3 X80 Y80 YAO
143. H108 D15 1 Station No 8 setting e_O H2409 D16 Station No 9 setting H20 012 K5 1 Station No 1 setting 1 M9038 97 0 1 scan Refresh after RUN specification OF 99 5 M2 1 Module Module error ready X 111 Startup 123 8 26 completion M3 1 abnormal completion M3 1 Y6 1 Y6 7 H668 Data link startup Data link startup D100 Kl 1 Error code storage Y6 1 Data link startup M3 1 END 1 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 8 8 2 Parameter setting example on the Q series The following shows an example of parameter setting using GX Developer MELSOFT series GX Developer C A to Q QO6HCPU_a Network parameters Setting the CC Link list s Project Edit Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help S 21 1 4 47 Fala Program Sf Ed al Efe epe ode iis poe ETE ES 6 of boards in module Boards Blank no setting Program Device comment E Parameter PLC parameter perationa i LU perational settings a Network param we Master station 25 Remote pass El Device memory Remote net Ver 1 mode Device init ilconnect count Remote y y y g Po Network parameter x Remoteo
144. J61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Name QJ61BT11N Compat Precautions for replacement ibility The mode is set on the Q series using the network parameters 5 0069 Module mode A The setting be checked 0060 Setting status of block 4 ed on the Q series an SBOO6F guarantee of cyclic data per A replacement is not applied station Master station return SB0079 2 specification information Host master standby master 5 007 operation status Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting status 5 007 in case of programmable controller CPU STOP x Added on the Q series and SBOOBA Standby master station test replacement is not applied result Transmission speed test result 5 0184 for standby master station Transmission speed test 5 0185 accept status Transmission speed test 5 0186 completion status 8 19 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 8 20 b Link special register SW Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Name AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N Precautions for replacement Dedicated instruction retry SW000B count setting Added on the Q series and Specification of remote device replacement is not applied SW0014
145. L WO 100 17F 200 2BF Area for M L 2 Setting ranges of network 2 link parameters The REMFR REMTO instructions do not use B W and the setting of B W is not required Only X Y are set X0 200 28F 400 4 y o area used by the host R4 R2 station Area for M R YO 230 30F 480 59F I O area used by the host R1 R2 station Area for M R 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O A MELSECNET H module set as normal station requires network parameter setting For replacement of MELSECNET 1 module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU newly set network parameters The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET H Common parameter Network range assignment Refresh parameter 1Mp1 O Refer to example in e 2 and 3 Refer to example in e 4 2MR Refer to example f 1 2 Refer to example f 3 1 52 O Refer to example in g 2 1Ns3 Refer to example in g 2 2R2 2R3 Setting required Setting required Default setting is also acceptable 3 16 3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET Il AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 17 MELSECNET master station The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET master station A3ACPU 1 Network parameter setting A3ACPU MELSECNET master station
146. LSECNET 10 mode Maximum number LX LY 8192 points of link points 8192 points network LW 8192 points Maximum number of link LY LB 8 2 x LW lt 2000 bytes O points per station Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token bus method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method Manchester code Transmission method Single bus Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to No 255 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC annot be set Maximum number of networks to PLC networks and to PLC networks and A o Alternate them with unused remote networks remote networks network Nos Maximum number of groups 9 Number of stations connected 32 stations Control station 1 normal station 31 one network Applicable cable i 5C 2V Q Overall distance 300m Vi i 5C 2V 500m e Distance between stations 302V 300m i Wi 5C 2V 500m Error control system CRC X 6 X12 1 and retry by a time over Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Prevention of system down by switching the control 7 station RAS function T Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions N N communication e g N N communication e g f For co
147. LWTP instruction setting fault Delete when used in a LWTP processing 3 Error at relevant sequence program D9201 N results station Refer to Section 2 6 2 4 Relevant station Transient instructions LRDP execution disabled D9202 Stores whether or not D9203 the slave station is a Delete when used ina 9241 Local station link MELSECNET Rone sequence program due type compatible station or a to MELSECNET H 9242 MELSECNET II system compatible station 0 Forward loop during data link 1 Reverse loop 0 Normal during data link 1 Stop instruction 2 Loopback issued implemented in Check whether or not 2 No common E forward reverse SW0049 the data link is normally directions 51 0090 of data link SW0049 D9204 Link status mE Common A m 3 Loopback to transmission stop arameter amor Loop status is judged implemented in SW009A 4 dem Station comprehensively by only forward SW0090 to SW009A MES CPU error direction E 6 Communication 4 Loopback canceled implemented only in reverse direction 5 Data link disabled St th b Station Station that Loopback station aie 2 D9205 implementing implemented forward SW0099 p id forward loop side the loopback on the loopback loopback forward loop side St th b Station Station that i ud ia oopback station stations executin D9206 implementing implemented reverse SW009A 9 reverse l
148. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type AnS QnAS Small Type Series to Q Series Handbook Network Modules 4 di Ne Ba EON eee 2012 Edition SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this handbook and the relevant manuals introduced in this handbook carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this handbook the safety precautions are classified into two levels NWARNING and NCAUTION WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under NCAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this handbook and then keep the handbook in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING For the operating status of each station after a communication failure in the data link or the network refer to the following manuals Failure to do so may result in a
149. MOTE I O NETWORK b Link special register SW Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for QnA QnAS series Q series MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module ibility replacement Baton pass status of each station Cyclic transmission status of each station SW0070 to SW0073 SW0070 to SW0073 SW0074 to SW0077 SW0074 to SW0077 For link special relay SB and link special register SW that not described in this section refer to each manual 5 47 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 6 2 Comparison of dedicated instruction 1 A AnS series Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description series MELSECNET 10 module Instruction name Q series MELSECNET H module Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Reads data from the buffer memory of special function Reads data from the buffer memory of the intelligent ZNFR instruction cannot be used ZNFR instruction module the target remote I O function module the target Change it to REMFR station remote I O station instruction Writes data to the buffer Writes data to the buffer ZNTO instruction cannot memory of special function memory of the intelligent be used ZNTO instruction A module in the target remote I O station 2 QnA QnAS series function module in the target re
150. NET II module MELSECNET H module Compat coaxial loop coaxial bus ibility 3C 2V 10km 300m A Refer to below 5C 2V 10km 500m ibd d 3 When the overall distance does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications either use an AGBR10 A6BR10 DC type repeater unit in the network or configure a separate network Precautions for replacement b Distance between stations O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNET Il module MELSECNET H module Compat MG Precautions for replacement coaxial loop coaxial bus ibility 3C 2V 500m 300m A Refer to below 5C 2V 500m 500m 4 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications either use an AGBR10 A6BR10 DC type repeater unit in the network The following shows the extension method when a repeater unit for the AGBR10 AGBR10 DC type MELSECNET 10 coaxial bus system is used For details refer to the Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET 10 Coaxial Bus System type AGBR10 A6BR10 DC User s Manual IB 66499 1 The distance between stations of 500m 5C 2V and 300m 3C 2V be extended Max 200m 5C 2V 3C 2V 71 11 R Terminal resistor 500m 5C 2V gt Max 300m 3C 2V 2 Up to four repeater units can be used in a single network 5 The overall distance can be extended to a maximum distance of 2 5 km
151. NET 10 Network System Reference Manual number 66690 13JF78 Manual CC Link System Master Local Module AJ61QBT11 66722 13 873 A1SJ61QBT11 User s Manual Appendix 2 4 Q series No Manual name Manual number Model code Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System 1 SH 080049 13JF92 Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System 2 SH 080124 13JF96 Reference Manual Remote I O network CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 3 SH 080394E 13JR64 QJ61BT11N App 3 4 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and s
152. NT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK b Performance comparison of AJ71LP21G and QJ71LP21G Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for QJ71LP21G NM AJ71LP21G ibility replacement MELSECNET 10 mode Maximum number LX LY 8192 points of link points 8192 points network LW 8192 points Maximum number of link LY LB 8 2 x LW lt 2000 bytes O points per station Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to No 255 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC cannot be set Maximum number of networks to PLC networks and to PLC networks and A Alternate them with unused remote networks remote networks network Nos Maximum number of groups 9 Number of stations connected 64 stations Control station 1 normal station 63 one network Applicable cable optical cable Overall distance 30km Distance between stations optical cable 2km Error control system CRC X8 X12 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function fo
153. Necessary setting No setting Already set Setifitismeeded No setting Already set 1120 No Valid module menn 2224 during other station access 1 Interlink transmission parameter Input the start 1 0 No installed in the module in 16 point unit Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Check End Cancel 2 Network range assignment MELSECNET II 3 tier master station m Setup common parameters r Assignment method Points Start Start End Switch screens settings Monitoring time 201 10ms Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station L R First half LB First half Lw Second half LB Second half Lw station No Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End mo 19 0100 cr 328 no OF IL 1 328 mso or 328 mso m 1 3 Refresh parameter ASUCPU MELSECNET 1 3 tier master station m Assignment method Points Start Start End Link side PLC side e x E BlockNo Ponts Stat LB lt gt B transmission 1 0000 027 oO 640 0000 r Transient transmission error history status verwrite G Hold LW lt gt W transmission 1 0000 027 1 640 0000 LX LY X Y transmission d MELSECNET Il 3 tier local station 11 12
154. Number Compatible A Partial change required Incompatible MELSECNETH special relay Description Compat ibility Precautions for replacement When the MELSECNET II master station is the MELSECNET H uid PUN or STEP Stores the CPU specified control M9253 Master station RUN status SW0084 to Each station CPU RUN status of each 2 iheonaration operation status ON STOP or PAUSE SW0087 RUN status 2272 T statis station status is distinguished by the corresponding bit of the control station specified on SW0084 to SW0087 OFF All stations OFF RUN or STEP ae 2 Operating status of RUN status Each station CPU 9254 5 0084 ON Stat th other local stations STOP or PAUSE RUN status iR O status STOP of PAUSE status exist OFF All stations normal n ON Station where Local station error OFF Normal Cyclic transmission amp velic M9255 stations other 580074 status of each y ON Abnormal j transmission than host station station executing exist 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Master station special register Special register enabled when host station is the master station Special register the case of MELSECNET Il master station Description Number Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNETH special register Description Pre
155. OV G219 22 Obtains the write data length U20 544 20 06220 7021 22 Transfers the work area value to device U20 H434E 20 B8wov 620 021 22 Transfers the work area value to device U20 H4420 20 620 021 22 Transfers the work area value to D device U20 H5720 20 6220 woz1 22 Transfers the work area value to W device U20 FMOV H0 G216 K40 Clears the LWTP instruction work area to zero U20 LWTP instruction receive request Mov K5 G174 5 Processing completion SD2041 0 For a local station in the third tier receives the DMOV W1020 20 data of the second tier master station W device reception First half U20 Start No 20 No of words Z1 BMOV 6102420 020 21 Obtains W of the master station from the local module First half 02041 1 6 i W device reception Latter half 100 Start ZO No of words 21 U20 BMOV 06102420 Wozo 21 Obtains W of the master station from the local module Latter half 502041 0 device reception First half DMOV W1022 20 Start No 20 No of words Z1 MOV ZO 72 5 22 K4 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits U20 BMOV 0659272 4 070 71 Obtains of the master station from the local module First half 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE 1 B AS THE LOCAL SD2041 1 DMOV 9204 BMOV 659272 207 5 400 MOV 7 11 W1026 20 22 K4B0ZO RST SET 502042 502043 50204
156. PU Master module Remot Lo T Channel 1 HH READ H u Channel 2 Channel 3 i l Channel 4 2594 Word device Channel 5 M 2594 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 WRITE Write other station word device Writes device to object network number remote station in 16 bit units Remote CPU Master module module Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 i Word device 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK b For multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station Can be used x Cannot be used Execution Target station station Multiplexed Multiplexed remote remote Instruction Name Description QnPH QnPRH SEND Data sending RECV Data receiving SEND Writes data to the target station network module of the target network No RECV Reads the data sent by SEND to the CPU device Network module Network module Channel 1 Logical channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 i Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Logical channel 2 Channel 2 Logical channel 3 Channel 3 Logical channel 4 Channel 4 Logical channel 6 Channel 6 Channel 7
157. R LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or
158. SB SW that have different applications on the QnA QnAS series and the Q series a Link special relay SB O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N Precautions for replacement Master station switching data Refresh instruction at standby The specifications of A AnS 5 0001 ee series and Q series are the link start master switching same Refresh instruction when 5 0003 changing parameters by the dedicated instruction Master station duplication error 5 0007 canceling request Added the series Transmission speed test 80008 replacement is not applied request 5 000 Forced master switching Remote device station 80000 initialization procedure registration instruction Communication command 1 5 0030 acceptance Not used on the Q series SB0031 Communication command 1 Delete the sequence program complete of the section corresponding to SB0032 Communication command 2 the function and replace acceptance READ WRITE instructions with Communication command 2 RIRD RIWT instructions SB0033 complete Forced master switching 5 0046 executable status Master station duplication error 5 0057 canceling acknowledgement Master station duplication error 5 0058 canceling complete Master switching request SB005A acknowledgement Master switching request 5 005 complete Added on the Q
159. SECNET Il This section describes the method to replace some programmable controller CPUs in an existing MELSECNET II network to QCPU or add QCPUs without changing whole MELSECNET 11 network Outline Mount a local station data link module to the QA1S6LIB extension base unit for series Q mode or the QAGLIB A A1S module conversion adapter requires the A1ADP SP and then connect it to the MELSECNET II 1 Q series High Performance model QCPU QA1S6L type extension base unit Local station data link module MELSECNET 11 Model name Product name A1SJ71AP23Q MELSECNET II local station data link module for optical fiber cable SI A1SJ71AR23Q MELSECNET II local station data link module for coaxial cable A1S71AT23BQ MELSECNET B local station data link module for shielded twisted pair cable Note Present MELSECNET 11 data link module can not be used Notes 1 The module can only be used with any of the following High Performance model QCPU QO2 H CPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 2 The module is dedicated to local stations 3 A base unit that can be mounted to the module is the QA1S6LIB or QAGLIB A A1S module conversion adapter requires the A1ADP XY 1 The existing Universal model QCPUs do not support a local station data link module Soon will be supported To use the supporting Universal model QCPU the QA 1S extension base unit is required The existing Universal
160. SECNET 10 mode MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET H extended mode 8192 points MELSECNET mode 1024 points MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET II composite mode 4096 points MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET H extended mode 16384 points XY Maximum number of link points per network Ww MELSECNET mode 1024 points MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET II composite mode 4096 points MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET H extended mode 16384 points Maximum number of link points per station MELSECNET mode 1024 bytes MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II composite mode First half 1024 bytes Second half 1024 bytes MELSECNET 10 mode MELSECNET H mode LY LB 8 2 x LW S 2000 bytes MELSECNET H extended mode LY LB 8 2 x LW 35840 bytes When the number of bytes exceeds 2000 mount two modules having the same network No or set all modules on the network in the MELSECNET H extended mode Communication speed 1 25Mbps 10Mbps Number of stations connected in one 65 stations master station 1 64 stations control station 1 normal Set the remote network to a separate network For the 65th station local station remote I O station 64 station 63 network configure a separate network Applicable cable GI optical cable Overall distance 10km 30k
161. SECNET H Network range station To enable the multiplexed remote assignment designation sub master station to control the common NN Remote sub remote station the setting is parameter master station A required specification Supplemental settings Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Routing parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other Valid module during other station access station access o 1 The multiplexed remote sub master station is the station type of the multiplex master system Only the following CPU modules support the multiplex master system Process CPU Redundant CPU 5 43 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK d Parameter of parallel remote master station Parameter name Network parameter O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series MELSECNET 10 module Network type Starting I O No Network No Network range assignment common parameter Total number of slave stations Monitoring time BW setting XY setting Sub BW setting Sub XY setting Remote sub master station specification Reserved station designation assignment setting Supplemental settings Refresh parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other station access Q series MELSECNET H module Compat
162. SECNET H master station MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H Optical loop Optical loop x e Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H NP ibility replacement Network type Network type Starting No Starting No Mandatory for the No setting Network No MELSECNET H Total number of slave stations Total number of slave stations LB LW assignments on the master station and remote o stations Master E LB LW assignments on the Master 2 2 1 5 Station inherent parameter station 2 master station and remote station E 2 stations D Supplemental settings 2 Secured data send 3 c c A Supplemental settings 2 Secured data receive E LX LY assignments on the LX LY assignments on the Z master station and remote master station and remote stations I O stations Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Remote I O Remote I O 5 No setting No setting station station 1 This is set when the AnU AnUS H QnA QnASCPU is mounted 2 Applied when LB LW are set for both the first half second half on MELSECNET 1 For details refer to Section 3 5 2 Parameter change example 3 This is the data separation prevention function for reading writing cyclic data of two words or more in a single operation
163. SECNET II the distance between stations may become shorter 1 INTRODUCTION e 3 tier system 2 System configuration example using 2 tier local stations and 3 tier remote I O stations MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical Nc Optical loop 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET I system cables optical cables etc has to lt OMNCM 2 CPU When replacing from an integrated VN i i 4Ns2 2M type CPU one new slot 32 points is MA required 3 Number of stations When 65 modules Network 2 connected measures e g dividing into two networks of 64 modules or less having a different network No are required 1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than that of MELSECNET II the distance between stations may become shorter f 3 tier system 3 System configuration example using local stations remote stations MELSECNET II MELSECNET H System configuration precautions 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II Optical loop system cables optical cables etc has to be changed 2 CPU When replacing from an integrated type CPU one new slot 32 points is 3 Composite system As a mixture of a PLC to PLC network and
164. SECNET II composite mode to MELSECNET 10 Communicable B W range is to when AnN AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU are mixed on MELSECNET 10 When the second half is set on the MELSECNET II composite mode it is necessary to divide with station inherent parameter for transferring data but the station inherent parameter cannot be set on AnN AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU AnACPU can communicate at the range of B WO to FFF but station inherent parameter cannot be set From here onwards it may cause a communication error of the area divided by station inherent parameter at the other station where transmission of B W 400 or later cannot be made When replacing MELSECNET II composite mode with MELSECNET 10 where AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPUJ are mixed replace AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU with a CPU that is applicable to MELSECNET 10 such as QCPU 2 75 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET II AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O NETWORK 3 1 List of MELSECNET 1 MELSECNET B Alternative Models 1 Replacement of MELSECNET Il modules with MELSECNET H modules Network type Optical loop CPU integrated type A AnS A0J2 H series A1NCPUP21 A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUP21 S1 21 A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUP21 S1 21 A2CCPUP21 A0J2HCPUP21 Alternative models for Q series CPU module QJ71LP21 25 Optical loop
165. SI cable supported Optical loop CPU integrated type A1NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 S3 A2NCPUP21 S4 21 3 A2ACPUP21 S3 A2ACPUP21 S4 21 3 CPU module QJ71LP21G Optical loop cable supported Coaxial loop CPU integrated type A1NCPUR21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPUR21 S1 21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPUR21 S1 21 A2CCPUR21 A0J2HCPUR21 CPU module QJ71BR11 Coaxial bus Optical loop Standalone AJ71AP21 A1SJ71AP21 QJ71LP21 25 Optical loop SI cable supported Optical loop Standalone AJ71P21 S3 AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71P22 S3 AJ71AP22 S3 A1SJ71AP21 S3 QJ71LP21G Optical loop GI cable supported Coaxial loop Standalone QJ71BR11 Coaxial bus XI A1SJ71AR21 Optical loop Standalone AJ72P25 i QJ72LP25 25 Optical loop SI cable supported Remote station AJ72P25 S1 Optical loop Standalone AJ72P25 S3 is QJ72LP25G Optical loop GI cable supported Remote station A0J2P25 Coaxial loop Standalone 0028 Remote seitan AJ72R25 S1 QJ72BR15 Coaxial bus 1 A0J2R25 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 2 Replacement of MELSECNET B modules with MELSECNET H modules Network type series Alternative models for Q series AJ7
166. The general specifications of programmable controllers are as follows Please do not store spare parts under a high temperature or high humidity condition even within the range guaranteed by the specifications Storage ambient temperature 20 to 75 C Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 no condensation Store in a place avoiding direct sunlight Store under a condition with no dust or corrosive gas The capacity of the batteries such as an A6BAT battery and an A8BAT battery or a lithium coin battery commercially available for memory card is decreased by its self discharging even when it is not used Replace it with new one in 5 years as a guideline For a power supply module CPU module with built in power supply or analog module that uses any aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is indicated in the table below take the following measures since the characteristics will be deteriorated when the aluminum electrolytic capacitor is left un energized for a long time Product Model A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 ATNCPUR21 ATNCPUP21 S3 A2CCPU CPU module A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF Power supply built in type A2CJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU A61P A61PEU A61P UL A62P A62PEU A63P A68P A61RP A67RP Power supply module A2CJ66P A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P A62DA A62DA S1 Analog module A1S64AD A1S68AD A1S62DA A1S68DAI A1S68DAV A1S63ADA A1S66ADA Countermeasures for preventing aluminum electrolytic capacitor c
167. Word device READ HELREADH 2 n SREAD station word Channel 3 device read Channel4 2594 device Channel5 l 2594 Channel 6 H 1 1 i LChannel8 Writes data to CPU device on target station of target network No in 16 bit units Devices on the target station can be turned ON by SWRITE CPU___ l Network module Network module 1 CPU os WRITE Other Channel 1 Word device station word n Chamel2 1 n x SWRITE ain i device write Dog Hwrire n 1 11 1 Channel i Channel6 T i 1 Cnamet7 8 i to next page 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC Can be used x Cannot be used Execution Target station station Instruction Name Description QCPU AnUS H A compatible instruction Reads CPU device data on target stations of target network No sane CPU Network module Network module ___ ___ Other A channel i 7 11 Fixed 1 1 ZNRD station word H H Ec o o olo device read H Word device ME di a A compatible instruction Writes data to CPU device on target station of target network No CPU ___ Network module Network
168. able cable add i d 5C 2V o Using the optical loop system or Overall distance 2 2 AG6BR10 A6BR10 DC repeater Vi i 5C 2V 30km 5C 2V 500m n A P unit is recommended 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 When the X Y numbers are duplicate one side only is taken into consideration To next page 4 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 32 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 26 5 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 27 Distance between stations Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ72QLR25 A1SJ72QLR25 3C 2V 300m 5C 2V 500m QJ72BR15 Precautions for replacement Error control system 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over RAS function Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Ne
169. ables can be used for the MELSECNET H only all stations must be replaced with QCPU Twisted When replacing the stations with QCPU step by step or Section 2 2 1 replacing with the remote I O network change the twisted 3 pair cables to coaxial bus cables The twisted pair cables Cable laying Cost pair cannot be used for the remote I O network All the existing stations are required to be replaced with the Network module MELSECNET 10 modules Only first half set in second tier system Setting made to the existing network parameter can be Section 2 5 1 utilized without change 1 Station specific parameter setting is required Latter half set in If the AnN AnA or AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU Section 2 5 1 on software second tier system exists newly set network parameters and modify the 1 program Since the second tier and the third tier is separate network Section 2 5 3 reviewing the network parameter and program is required Section 2 5 4 By simultaneous replacement to the MELSECNET 10 replacing arbitrary station with the QCPU is possible Extensibility If modification on software is required modifying it at replacement of the first module allows omitting modification to the second module or later Modification Three tier system A 4 Twisted pair cables can be used by replacing the remote I O station with a normal sta
170. according to the existing network system Model Product name A1SJ71AP23Q local station data link module for optical fiber cable SI A1SJ71AR23Q MELSECNET II local station data link module for coaxial cable A1S71AT23BQ MELSECNET B local station data link module for shielded twisted pair cable 7 3 Precautions for Using Local Station Data Link Module 1 2 3 4 This section describes precautions for using the local station data link module Precautions for selection When connecting the QCPU to the MELSECNETI II B the existing data link module cannot be used Make sure to select a module from Model list in Section 7 2 Available CPUs and mountable base units For details on QCPUs where a local station data link module can be used and on mountable base units refer to Section 1 1 3 Number of mountable modules Up to six local station data link modules can be mounted to one CPU module When using the module such as the AD51H which can be mounted to the QA1S6LIB or QAGLIB but the number of mountable modules are restricted Precautions for three tier system If the replaced station is the master station for the third tier since the QCPU cannot be the MELSECNET II master station measures such as replacing the MELSECNET H 10 to the third tier are required 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE MELSECNET II B AS THE LOCAL 7 4 Network Parameter This section describes network paramet
171. after the added station is required Due to restrictions on station to station distance in some cable types check the cable type if the distance is long Section 2 2 1 1 Coaxial Cable loop laying Change from coaxial loop to coaxial bus is required One side of the existing coaxial cable can be utilized Due to restrictions on overall cable distance if the distance is long repeater module is required Section 2 2 1 2 Twisted pair Since the twisted pair cables can be used for the MELSECNET H only all stations must be replaced with QCPU When replacing the stations with QCPU step by step or replacing with the remote I O network change the twisted pair cables to coaxial bus cables The twisted pair cables cannot be used for the remote I O network 1 Section 2 2 1 3 Network module All the existing stations are required to be replaced with the MELSECNET 10 modules Modification on software Only first half set in second tier system Data link is possible by only changing the existing network parameter according to the added station s Section 2 5 1 1 Latter half set in second tier system Station specific parameter setting is required If the AnN AnA or AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU exists newly set network parameters and modify the program Section 2 5 1 1 Three tier system Since the second tier and the third tier is separate networ
172. all picture of CPU side device assignments on the QO6HCPU to which the PLC to PLC network control station and remote network remote master station is mounted be checked at Assignment image diagram in the GX Developer network parameters After setting the parameters make sure that assignments are correctly set Device PLC side side LX Display 171 magnification Duplication of device Refresh device Dev source of transfer between links D Dev target of transfer between links 0000 QO6H Module 1 Module 2 0000 0800 0800 1000 1000 Device PLC side Device Link side LY Display 171 magnification Duplication of device Refresh device Dev source of transfer between links Dev target of transfer between links 0000 QO6H Module 1 Module 2 0000 0800 0800 1000 1000 3 21 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O g MELSECNET H normal station network 1 The following shows the network parameter settings for when a station is replaced with a MELSECNET H control station network 1 The same parameter settings are required on all normal stations 1 Network parameter setting 1 Ns 2 MELSECNET H normal station 2 Refresh parameters 1 Ns 2 MELSECNET H normal station Assignment method Points Start Start End 0000 O1FF 0000 00 2 000 2 0
173. ameter QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 Assignment method Points Start Start End Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold Dev name Points Stat End Dev Points Start End TransferSB se 52 00 FF 52 TransferSw sw 52 00 Random cyclic LB Random cyclic LW pex 00 255 moo 255 0500 255 050 255 000 255 58 EE 000 25 0 2256 0 256 0280 256 0680 25 0 2 0 2l zx EE i ce 0600 0 414 414414414 c 028 068 0 0 en en m m m m m m mimimi m 4 4 1414 End Cancel Default 4 Refresh parameter 6 MELSECNET H network 2 control station 2Mp3 Assignment method e Points S Transient transmission error history status UAE 6 Overwrite Hold Start End ESSET ECT Dev name Points Stat End TransferSB 000 TransferSW 5 92 Random cyclic LB 1 Randomeyclic LW 1 J Transfer 4 18 0100 4 184 00 Transfer 7 18 gt Transfers 18 gt 18 090 Tranfed LB 18 v 18 0580
174. ammable controller CPUs in the system with QCPUS data will be shared by installing a gateway station which relays cyclic communication data between MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNETV II This chapter describes the method to perform cyclic communication data relay between the existing MELSECNETI II network system and the new MELSECNET 10 network system using a gateway set 6 1 Applicaton of Gateway Station Using Gateway Set Gateway set is a set of modules required to work as a gateway station where passes and shares the link data between MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 based on the network system communication medium cable 1 Adding QCPU to the existing MELSECNET II network system Example 2 A gateway station is introduced into part of the 5 series system to System before transition add a series system System after transition Gateway set Gateway station Master station Qn 10 1 The system for the added Q series is built T no with MELCECNET 10 station ll iab 2 The MELSECNET 10 system is connected to the MELSECNET II system Local with the gateway station station The existing A Ans series system is used as it is Since QCPUs imcompatible with MELSECNET II the network system is built in MELSECNET 10 by adding a gateway station to the exi
175. ammable instructions for reading the programmable controller 2 controller CPU of local writing devices on the 1 CPU of normal stations Transient stations programmable controller Wn Other stations are accessed A transmission Other stations are accessed CPU of other stations to the from GX Developer connected from GX Developer connected READ WRITE or ZNRD to the control station to the master station ZNWR instructions M The control station and other The master station is Refer to Section 2 6 2 normal stations are accessed accessed from GX Developer from GX Developer connected connected to local stations to a normal station When a disconnected local When a disconnected normal Automatic return station returns to normal status station returns to normal status function it is automatically restored and it is automatically restored and the data link is resumed the data link is resumed In the case of an optical loop In the case of an optical loop system and coaxial loop system system faulty parts are faulty parts are disconnected disconnected when fault e g when fault e g cable Loopback function cable disconnection occurs disconnection occurs and AM and normal operation is normal operation is continued continued on operable stations on operable stations as a result as a result of the loopback of the loopback Faulty parts are detected by
176. and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or techni
177. annel 7 M Logical channel 7 channel 7 i O O 9 H Channel 8 i i Logical channel 8 channel 8 I I Reads the CPU device data 16 bit units from the target station having the target network number CPU Network module Network module CPU Other station i ipenannelit p zi Word device READ d dedi HH rean H u Chanel2 1 word device x SREAD 3k 2 read Y Channel4 T 2594 Word device Channel5 j n l 2594 n Channel 6 11 Channel 7 LET FOhane8 iI Pees ie See b Lhandtienzb Hip ee Writes data 16 bit units to the CPU device of the target station having the target network number SWRITE can turn on the device of the target station CPU Network module Network module 1 CPU Other station i T ind WRITE ddei 5 T am T Word device 6 5 word device anne x SWRITE Honana ie it ji br H write Channel 4 T 361 11 5 i H Channelo 1 iI FOhamned 7 T Fenanel8 1 ETE lee enna qu eer fe onec Trace ea Issues remote RUN and clock data read write requests to other stations Requesting PU Newark Network module ___ transient Channel 1 i IChanmel2 REQ transmission Deramas T O O x 11
178. ansmission cannot be relayed Network diagnostics Diagnostics are required the MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 respectively Number of link data Link data 1 The number of B W points assigned to one station is limited Since all data cannot be relayed narrow down the data to be relayed by setting priorities 2 Both network diagnostics can be performed by connecting GX Developer to the gateway station 2 Cyclic data transmission delay Transmission delay shall be the time that relay processing delay time is added to each cyclic transmission delay time the MELSECNET II system and the MELSECNET 10 system Confirm that the delay does not affect the control on modules 3 Restrictions on system configuration a Set the MELSECNETI II side of gateway station as local station in the second tier According to the MELSECNET II specifications local station cannot be mounted as a gateway station on one CPU because of the local station in the second tier and master station for the third tier combination restriction When the existing master station is AnU AnUS H CPU QnA QnASCPU and the MELSECNET 10 module is added as a gateway station with the existing MELSECNET II configured as is there are no restrictions b Atthe gateway station elongation and variation of the scan time may occur due to link refreshes of both MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 It is recommended that the gateway station only shall relay the
179. ansmission format HDLC standards frame format Error control system CRC 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable RAS function 6 nS O Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Master station When the master station is Master station Number of occupied CPU integrated type 0 point replaced from a CPU 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli A points Standalone 32 points per slot I O 32 points integrated type one new slot assignment special 32 points n 32 points is required 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 2 Comparison between MELSECNET Il module coaxial loop and MELSECNET H module coaxial bus Compatible Partial change required Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET Il module MELSECNET H module Coaxial loop Coaxial bus QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15 Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Max 2048 points and max number of points of CPU module on master 8192 points station Maximum 16384 points number of B Remote master station remote I O link points station 8192 points remote I O station remote master station 8192 points ae Eee 1024 points station remote I O II composite mode
180. arameter parameter i Lew 100 180 200 280 400 500 580 600 V 67F 1Mp3 2Mp3 2 1 2Ns2 Empty 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 Link refresh Apes hee eden eee em eee em ene E ee eed eee eee ee ee eee eee 1 i i ined 1 B W 0 100 180 200 280 400 500 580 600 67 1 joa i i i i 1Mp3 2 3 2Ns1 2Ns2 Empty 1Mp3 2 3 2Ns1 2Ns2 i i i 1 Designation of arrow in the figure Cyclic communication common parameter Transfers LB LW which has been set on common parameter to all stations of MELSECNET H by cyclic communication Transit by station inherent parameter LB LW which has been set on common parameter is changed to LB LW inherent to MELSECNET H station and transferred Inter link data transfer Inter link data transfer from module 1 to 2 Transfers LB LW between modules with different lt Inter link data transfer from module 2 to 1 network numbers mounted to one CPU 4 Link fresh q Transfers LB LW of MELSECNET H to the device of CPU 2 45 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 46 Network parameter setting required for control and normal stations on MELSECNET H The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET H Common parameter Network range assignment Station inherent parame
181. arameter OFF Match sequence program as a M9207 N 9 check results ON Mismatch 3 tier system cannot be configured Master station B W OFF Transmits to Delete when used in a M9208 transmission range tier2 Bud tier3 None sequence program as a setting only master Transmits to 3 tier system cannot be station of lower link tier2 only configured Check instructions OFF Executing the Delete when used in a M9209 of link check function None x sequence program as a only master station ON Check non 3 tier system cannot be of lower link execution configured Link card error for OFF Normal OFF Normal M9210 SB0020 Module stat master station ON Abnormal ON Abnormal OFF Online ON Offline station OFF Online M9224 Link status to station test 5 0043 Online switch ON Other than or self loopback online test When ON confirm the loop status by 5 0090 OFF Normal The loop status can 5 0090 Host tati USER SES ON Abnormal also be judged by the host station bits of 1 SW0091 to SW0094 M9225 Forward loop error OFE Normal ON Abnormal SB0092 when host F dl tati station is d as ned OFF Normal remote Abnormal master station master station to next page 23 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O Special relay in the case of MELSECNET Il master station Description Num
182. arting I O No Network No 240 to No 255 cannot be set Network No Network No Alternate them with unused network Nos Set the group No in GX Developer Group No network parameters Set the mode in GX Developer Mode network parameters Station inherent parameter Station inherent parameter Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Use QCPUS other than those above Refresh parameters Inter link data transfer Routing parameters Valid module during other station access Refresh parameters Inter link data transfer Routing parameters Valid module during other station access Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Use QCPUS other than those above 4 21 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 2 QnA QnAS series 4 22 Parameter name Network parameter a Parameter of control station Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Compat QnA QnAS series Se Precautions for replacement MELSECNET H module ibility MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET 10 mode Network type Network type Starting I O No Starting I O No Network No Network No Total number of slave Total number of slave stations stations e Set the group No in GX Developer Group No network parameters Set the mode in GX Developer Mode network parameters
183. ate them with unused network Nos Total number of slave Total number of slave stations stations o Set the group No in GX Developer Group No network parameters Set the mode in GX Developer Mode network parameters Monitoring Monitoring time time LB LW setting LB LW setting LX LY setting LX LY setting O Network range O master Network range 1 master assignment station assignment station specification common specification parameter Reserved parameter Reserved station station designation designation Supplemental Supplemental settings settings Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Station inherent parameter Station inherent parameter Q00 Q01CPU Use QCPUs other than those above Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Disabled when mounted to the Q00J Inter link data transfer Inter link data transfer Q00 Q01CPU Use QCPUs other than those above Routing parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other Valid module during other station access station access 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK b Parameter of normal station Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Parameter Q series Compat A AnS series Precautions for replacement name MELSECNET H module ibility MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET 10 mode Network parameter Network type Network type Starting I O No St
184. ation 1 normal station 63 one network SI optical cable Pss carla optical cable Broad band optical cable optical cable Overall distance 30km SI optical cable 500m H PCF optical cable 1km Distance between stations Broad band optical cable 1km optical cable 1km Error control system CRC X6 X12 X5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines function Prevention of system down by switching the control station Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions N N communication N N communication e g monitor program e g monitor program For comparison of dedicated Transient transmission up download up download link instruction refer to Dedicated link Dedicated link Section 4 6 2 instruction instruction IER SE THESIS 32 points per slot 32 points per assignment special 32 assignment intelli 32 O points points points 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 8 b Performance comparison of AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21S QJ71LP21S 25 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ71QLP21S QJ71LP21S 25
185. ation 2Ns1 2Ns2 Common parameters LB LW Link refresh 2 4 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1 2Ns2 002 1 Network parameter setting QQ2HCPU MELSECNET H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1 2Ns2 0000 O1FF 0000 0000 _ 027 027 2 42 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 5 4 Example of changing parameters on 3 tier system When the first half second half of link parameter is set The following shows how to change network parameter on LB LW when replacing the MELSECNET II 3 tier system with MELSECNET H Network range assignment of the present MELSECNET II 3 tier system is used as it is for replacement with MELSECNET H MELSECNET II 2 tier is replaced with the network 1 of MELSECNET H and 3 tier is replaced with the network 2 The MELSECNET II master station is replaced with the MELSECNET H control station and MELSECNET II local stations are replaced with MELSECNET H normal stations MELSECNET II Optical loop A3UCPU A2UCPU MELSECNET II 2 tier A3UCPU A2UCPU A2UCPU BWO 100 280 380400 500 680 780 FFF gt Link parameter of 2 tier M Empty Link parameter of 3 tier master station L1 m 100 180 200 280 500580 600 680 MELSECNET H Optical loop QO6HCPU Q02HCPU MELSECNET H Ne
186. atter half B device reception 2 Latter half Start No 20 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Obtains B of the other stations from the local module Latter half 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE MELSECNET II B AS THE LOCAL Transfers data of the special relay for link from M9240 to the area starting from SM1240 Transfers data of the special register for link SD2040 F 020 from D9243 to the area starting from SD1243 0259 K4SM1240 K Obtains data of the special relay for link 020 BMOV G315 D1243 K13 Obtains data of the special register for link X207 020 U20 LRDP instruction receive processing E K4 6172 DMOV 6176 20 Obtains the read start device name and start device No U20 Mov 0179 22 Obtains the read data length U20 FMW po UL Clears the LRDP instruction work area to zero U20 544 70 1 1021 6180 2 Transfers the device value to the work area U20 Has4e 70 1 021 9199 22 Transfers the device value to the work area U20 20 1 poza Sago z2 Transfers the D device value to the work area 020 5720 20 1 wozt 6180 2 Transfers the W device value to the work area U20 MOV K5 G172 LRDP instruction receive request 5 Processing completion X207 U20 U20 LWTP instruction receive processing mr Ka 6174 9216 20 Obtains the write start device name and start U20 device No M
187. ber Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Corresponding MELSECNETIH special relay Description Precautions for replacement When ON confirm the loop status by SW0090 OFF Normal The loop status can 5 0090 Host tat OSE ep sia ON Abnormal also be judged by the host station bits of OFF N SW0095 to SW0098 M9226 Reverse loop error ome ON Abnormal 5 0096 whenihost Reverse loo station is i OFF Normal status of the remote remote ON Abnormal master station master station OFF Not being executed ON Forward loop Offline test OFF Not instructed M9227 Loop test status test reverse SBOOAC e m instruction status ON Instructed loop test execution underway OFF All stations RUN or STEP OFF RUN or STEP RUN Local station RUN status Each station CPU M9232 5 0084 ON Stati in th 5 operation status ON STOP or PAUSE RUN status CHIMIE status STEP Or PAUSE status exist Local station error OFF No error Can be substituted by M92 detection status ON Error detection Nong SB0074 OFF No station detected Local station parameter M9235 remote I O station OFF No error SB007C Parameter status of errors parameter error ON Error detection each station ON station detection status detected parameter errors OFF Parameter Local station mE OFF communication remote Vel communication Parameter sta
188. ble Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 When the X Y numbers are duplicate one side only is taken into consideration 4 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 32 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 28 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 2 2 Cable performance comparisons 1 Optical fiber cable a Overall distance The overall distance 30km does not differ according to the optical fiber cable b Distance between stations 1 Sl optical fiber cable Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications A AnS QnA QnAS Q series series MELSECNET H module MELSECNET 10 module optical loop optical loop Compat Precautions for ibility replacement SI optical fiber cable Refer to below H PCF optical fiber cable Refer to 1 below Broad band H PCF optical fiber cable 1 When the distance between stations do not satisfy with specifications of MELSECNET H use at 10 Mbps of communication speed change the type of optical fiber cable or set the gateway station on the ex
189. ble 400m optical cable and H PCF Broad band H PCF optical optical cable cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km Error control system CRC 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS function Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up download etc with 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated TES peripheral device Monitor program up IN Transient transmission link instruction refer to Intelligent function download etc M Section 5 6 2 modules applicable Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 32 point lot 32 point lot Number of occupied a MM e gt anes I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelli 32 points points points 5 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote station remote master station 8192 points 2 remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiple
190. cal documents are subject to change without prior notice L NA 08048ENG E Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this handbook does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice L NA 08048ENG E 1211
191. cautions 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables 3C 2V has to be changed Coaxial loop to 5C 2v 1 Coaxial bus 2 Overall distance If this value exceeds the Q series specification value when MELSECNETI II system cables re Network used measures e g adding a repeater unit are required 1 1Ns1 1Ns2 2MP4 1 53 3 CPU When replacing integrated type CPU one new slot 32 points is required Network 2 4 Number of stations When 65 modules connected measures e g dividing into two or three networks of 32 modules orless having a different network No are required 5 Duplex loop When the transmission path has to be duplexed changes to an optical loop system etc are required 1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than MELSECNET II and as the transmission method is different the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter e 3 tier system 2 System configuration example using 2 tier local stations and 3 tier remote stations MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H System configuration precautions 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables 3C 2V has to be changed Coaxial loop
192. cautions for replacement Compat ibility 0 Normal completion 2 LRDP instruction setting fault Delete when used ina LRDP processing 3 Error at relevant sequence program D9200 results station None j A Refer to Section 2 6 2 4 Relevant station Transient instructions LRDP execution disabled 0 Normal completion 2 LWTP instruction setting fault Delete when used in a LWTP processing 3 Error at relevant sequence program D9201 N results station 20S A Refer to Section 2 6 2 4 Relevant station Transient instructions LRDP execution disabled D9202 Stores whether or not D9203 the slave station is a Delete when used in a D9241 Local station link MELSECNET None sequence program due type compatible station or a to MELSECNET H 9242 MELSECNET II system compatible station 0 Forward loop during data link 1 Reverse loop 0 Normal during data link 1 Stop instruction 2 Loopback issued implemented in Check whether or not 2 No common 22 forward reverse Swo0049 the data link is normally parameters directions 5 0090 Cause of data link SW0049 D9204 Link status un Common 3 Loopback to transmission stop arameter ertor Loop status is judged implemented in SW009A 4 is station comprehensively by only forward SWO0090 to 5 009 e CPU error direction vedi 6 Communication 4 Loopback canceled implemented only in
193. cceptable Setting not required 2 29 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC a MELSECNET Il 2 tier master station M The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET 1 2 tier master station A3UCPU 1 Network parameter setting MELSECNET 1 2 tier master station M rz Module No 1 Module No 2 Module No 3 Module No 4 NNET Master ton e Stat 70 Na a Total stations Staion No p Network range Refresh parameters Necessary settinal Already set Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Valid module during other station access fi zl Interlink transmission parameters Input the start No installed in the module in 16 point unit Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Check End Cancel 2 Network range assignment MELSECNET II 2 tier master station M Setup common parameters r Assignment method Points Start Start End siens 2 Switch screens Le LW settings px Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station lt L R station No MoO Monitoring time 2001 lt 10ms First half LB First half L w Second half LB Second half Lw Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat 0000 256 0000 OFF
194. changes to an optical loop system etc are required As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than MELSECNET II and as the transmission method is different the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter b 2 tier system 2 System configuration example using local stations only MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H System configuration precautions 1 Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables 3C 2V has to be changed to 5C 2V 1 2 Overall distance If this value exceeds the Coaxial loop Q series specification value when Coaxial bus MELSECNET II system cables are re used measures e g adding a repeater 1 Networki unit are required 3 CPU When replacing an integrated type CPU one new slot 32 points is required 4 Number of stations When 65 modules are connected measures e g dividing into two or three networks of 32 modules or less having a different network No are required 5 Duplex loop When the transmission path has to be duplexed changes to an optical loop system etc are required 1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than MELSECNET II and as the transmission method is different the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter 1 INTRODUCTION c 2 tier system 3 System configuration example using local stations rem
195. dd ibility replacement A1SJ71QLP21S MELSECNET 10 mode Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points network 8192 Maximum number of link WIS S000 bu Ot x points station ped Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote Maximum number of networks O networks Maximum number of groups 9 Number of stations connected 2 64 stations Control station 1 normal station 63 one network SI optical cable H PCF optical cable Applicable cable O Broad band H PCF optical cable QSI optical cable Overall distance 30km SI optical cable 500m H PCF optical cable 1km Distance between stations Broad band H PCF optical cable 1km O QSI optical cable 1km Error control system CRC X6 X12 X5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines A Prevention of system down by switching the control RAS function station Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special re
196. de Master station 1 to 64 The last station No of remote I O station is set QJ61BT11N Sets the station No of the module Setting range Master station 0 Local station 1 to 64 Standby master station 1 to 64 Precautions for replacement Sets the last station No at remote I O net mode with GX Developer Mode setting switch Sets the operation status of the module Transmission speed setting switch Sets the transmission speed of the module Sets the transmission speed and operating status of the module The mode setting and the transmission rate setting are performed with one switch The remote net mode and remote I O net mode are specified in GX Developer parameter settings Condition setting switch Sets the operation conditions lt Settings gt Station type Input data status of data link faulty station Number of occupied stations Module mode The operating conditions are set in the parameter settings of GX Developer Module mode setting is not required 8 9 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 2 QnA QnAS series Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for replacement Specifications Compat ibility Switch name AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N 8 10 Station number setting switch Sets the station No of the module lt Setting range gt For remote net mode Master station 0 Local
197. dicated instruction RLPASET instruction YnA YnB Prohibited to use Prohibited to use YnC Delete the sequence program of the section corresponding to the function and set parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction YnD E PROM erasure request Prohibited to use YnE YnF Y n 1 0 1 1 1 2 Y n 1 3 Y n 1 4 Y n 1 5 Y n 1 6 Y n 1 7 Y n 1 8 Y n 1 9 Y n 1 A Y n 1 B Y n 1 C Y n 1 D Y n 1 E 1 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use 8 15 9 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK 8 6 2 Buffer memory comparisons 1 A AnS series Buffer memory is divided into bankO to bank2 on the A AnS series but it is one area on the series Bank is switched with ON OFF of Y n 1 C Y n 1 D Buffer memory address of the Q series is shown in parenthesis as buffer memory addresses of communication buffer and automatic updating buffer are different Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Buffer memory address Buffer memory name Compat Precautions for AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement to SEH 0 to 95 Parameter information Parameter information 60H to 7FH 96 to 127 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use 80H to CDH 128 to 205 Parameter information Parameter information Parsmelerinformatian Added with
198. dule CPU Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 RSTOP Remote STOP O Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 it Channel 8 Other station RTMRD clock data read O O Hime Word device Clock data Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Other station RTMWR clock data written Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 5 52 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 7 Other Precautions 1 Remote network replacement precautions Replace modules of all the remote master stations and the remote stations with MELSECNET H module of the Q series The remote network of MELSECNET H cannot connect MELSECNET 10 modules of the A AnS QnA QnAS series and MELSECNET H modules of the Q series mixed 2 Processing time The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A AnS QnA QnAS series and the Q series For details on processing time refer to the manual for the respective module 3 Interface of remote station The interface to connect programming tools such as GX Developer differs between the A AnS QnA QnAS series and the Q series A AnS QnA QnAS series RS 422 interface series RS 232 interface When connecting to the Q series use the following RS 232 cable RS 232 cable QC30R2 4 Precau
199. e 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK RAS function Automatic return function Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description 5 series Q series MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module Returns the station disconnected from data link to the system when it goes to normal status and restarts data link Precautions for replacement Loopback function Keeps normal operation between operable stations by disconnecting faulty area at error occurrence such as cable break Station detach function Keeps normal operation between operable stations except faulty stations and stations switched off Diagnostic function Checks line conditions of the network and setting conditions of the module Substitute the forward loop reverse loop test for the station to station test Set diagnostic items for station to station test and forward loop reverse loop test in GX Developer network parameters Blown fuse error and input output verification error check disabled function Sets the error check of the blown fuse error and the input output verification error 2 Comparison with QnA QnAS series Cyclic transfer function Communicating with module Set the function with the PLC parameter of the remote module O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series Q series MELSECN
200. e refer to Section 3 5 2 System configuration using local and remote stations optical MELSECNET Il optical MELSECNETH optical Remarks proposed measure Optical loop Optical loop x b MELSECNET system comprising 65 connected modules The maximum number of stations on the MELSECNET H system is 64 one control station 63 normal stations The maximum number of stations on the MELSECNET 1 system is 65 one master station 64 local stations remote stations For this reason when the maximum number of 65 MELSECNET H modules are connected measures e g division into two networks of 64 modules or less having a different network No are required The control station of network No 1 configures a PLC to PLC network that controls normal station 1 and normal station 2 Network TRE Network 1 2 2 other network module becomes the remote master station and the remote I O network system of No 2 is configured 2 72 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Sequence program a Data separation prevention When two words 32 bits or more of cyclic data are handled the old data sometimes is mixed with the new data To read write cyclic data of two words or more in a single operation set data separation prevention by the following method 1 Interlock program using BW Data separation can be prevented by performing handshaking using BW between the cyc
201. e network having multiple stations in stages consider from the views from ease of replacement addition including the points from a to c above 2 Selection differs depending on system configuration network parameter setting and module replacement method other than network Select a method suitable for the actual system with reference to the contents starting from the following page 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Replacing the existing A AnS QnA QnASCPU with the QCPU This section describes the methods for replacing the A AnS OnA QnASCPU in the existing MELSECNET II with the QCPU a Replacing the network to the MELSECNET 10 simultaneously This method replaces arbitrary stations of the existing MELSECNET II with the QCPU and replaces the network to the MELSECNET 10 simultaneously Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration Replaced QCPU 1 Item Advantage Outline Reference Laying change is not required since the existing network Optical cable can be used without change Section 2 2 1 cable 9 Due to restrictions on station to station distance in some 1 cable types check the cable type if the distance is long Change from coaxial loop to coaxial bus is required Coaxial One side of the existing coaxial cable can be utilized Section 2 2 1 loop Due to restrictions on overall cable distance if the distance 2 is long repeater module is required Since the twisted pair c
202. e stations as a result of the loopback Error detection Faulty parts are detected by the data of special relays M9200 to 9255 and special registers D9200 to 9255 Faulty parts are detected by the data of link special relays SBO to 1FF and link special registers SWO to 1FF Change the devices in the sequence program Refer to Section 3 6 1 Self diagnosis test function Set the following test items by the mode setting switch Self loopback test Station to station test Forward loop reverse loop test Set the following test items by the mode setting switch Self loopback test Internal self loopback test Hardware test Set the following test items in the network parameters Forward loop reverse loop test Set the forward loop reverse loop test in the network parameter settings Substitute the station to station test with the forward loop reverse loop test 3 10 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 4 Switch Settings Comparisons 1 Comparison between MELSECNET Il modules and MELSECNET H modules Compatible A Partial change required Incompatible Description Compat Precautions for Switch name MIR MELSECNET II module MELSECNET H module ibility replacement Station number settin 9 Sets the station number Sets the station number switch The forward loop reverse Sets the mode for operation
203. eing modulation method differs Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Error control system CRC 6 12 6 1 retry by time over RAS function due to error 9r broken cable o Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Master station When the master station is Number of occupied CPU integrated type 0 point Master station replaced from a CPU L 9 aaa 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli A P points Standalone 32 points per slot I O assignment special 32 points 32 points integrated type one new slot 32 points is required 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O b Modules for optical cable Compatible Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET module MELSECNET H module Optical loop Compat MS Precautions for replacement ibility Optical loop QJ71LP21G QJ72LP25G Max 2048 points and max number of X Y points of CPU module on master 8192 points station 16384 points Maximum Remote master station remote I O number of B station 8192 points link points remote I O station remote master per station 8192 points network 16384 points MELSECNET mode 1024 points Remote master station remote I O MELSECNET composite mode station 8
204. en bus method A the communication method differs Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Noting to be noted though NRZI coding Non Return Encoding method Manchester code the encoding methods are to Zero Inverted different i The coaxial bus system cannot use the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus Using the optical loop System is recommended for using the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 239 Total number PLC to PLC networks and remote I O Maximum number of networks networks Up to 32 stations are available as the normal station of coaxial bus 65 stations Remote master 33 stations Remote master Number of stations connected system station 1 remote station 1 remote in one network 4 Using the optical loop station 64 station 32 system is recommended for connecting 33 normal stations or more 3C 2V Applicable cable 5C 2V Using the optical loop 3C 2V 19 2km 3C 2V 300m system or AGBR10 AGBR10 Overall distance A as 5C 2V 30km 5 2 500m DC repeater unit is recommended Distance between stations 5 2 500 Error control system 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over 1 Remote master station remote sub master s
205. ence program of the section Module reset acceptance corresponding to the function Xn4 complete Prohibited to use When the switch setting is changed turn the power supply of programmable controller system OFF gt ON or reset the programmable controller CPU Xn5 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Data link startup by buffer Xn6 memory parameter normal completion Data link startup by buffer Xn7 memory parameter error completion 2 Delete the sequence program of the section Xn8 Data link startup by E PROM ae corresponding to the function and set parameters parameter normal completion Prohibited to use with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction Xn9 Data link startup by E PROM RLPASET instruction parameter error completion Parameter registration to XnA 2 E PROM normal completion Parameter registration to XnB 2 E PROM error completion XnC Prohibited to use Prohibited to use XnD E PROM erasure normal Delete the sequence program of the section completion Prohibited to use corresponding to the function sel parameters TE EPROM erasure abnormal with GX Developer ur with dedicated instruction completion RLPASET instruction XnF Module ready Module ready X n 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 X n 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 m s Prohibited to use Prohibited to use X n 1 8 X n 1 9 X n 1 A X n 1 B X n 1 C X n 1 D X n 1 E X n 1 F 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK b Output signal Compatible
206. er information CC Link Ver installation parameter matching status Parameter mode Host parameter mode Transmission speed test result Transmission speed test result for each station Added on the Q series and replacement is not applied 8 23 9 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK 8 7 Other Precautions 1 2 3 8 24 This section describes other precautions Peripheral device connection module When AJ65BT G4 type peripheral connection module is used on the A AnS QnA QnAS series replace it with AJ65BT G4 S3 type peripheral connection module AJ65BT G4 type peripheral connection module cannot be used on the Q series Processing time The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A AnS QnA QnAS series and the Q series For details on processing times refer to the manual for the respective module Parameter registration to 2 As the Q series CC Link system master local module does not have 2 delete the sequence program of the section corresponding to the parameter registration to E2PROM On the Q series CC Link system master local module set the GX Developer network parameters to register parameters to the programmable controller CPU 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK P 8 8 Parameter Setting Example The following describes an example how to replace the system in which parameters were set using sequence program TO instruction on the A AnS series with the s
207. er for local station data link module 1 Setting the number of MELSECNET Ethernet cards The local station data link module does not require network parameter setting After configuring the network the module performs parameter communications with the master station and automatically acquires information necessarily for the network such as send range assignment for each station 2 Network refresh parameter Link refresh is not automatically performed Therefore create the sequence program which sends receives data using the FROM TO instructions for data transfer For details of I O signals for program creation and buffer memory address refer to the following manual Reference manual MELSECNET MELSECNET B Local Station Data Link Module User s Manual A necessary program for link refresh is offered by the A QnA Q conversion support tool as a sample program By integrating the sample program as the QCPU scan execution type program creating a program becomes unnecessary For A QnA to Q conversion support tool contact your local representative 3 Sample program The following shows conditions of a sample program for link refresh 1 Condition 1 Only for the MELSECNET mode and second tier Number of mounted local station data link modules 1 Module mounting address X Y200 to 21F slot Network type MELSECNET mode Send range for each station setting Only first half set Master station for the third tier B W
208. er with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction Newly set the parameter with GX Developer or the dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction 1 2 Specify Remote net Ver 1 mode or Remote I O net mode for the mode Automatic refresh parameter 2 QnA QnAS series Parameter name Network parameter Read write cyclic data with FROM TO instruction or set this parameter with dedicated instruction RRPA instruction Perform the automatic refresh setting with GX Developer or read write cyclic data with FROM TO instruction Perform the automatic refresh setting with GX Developer or read write cyclic data with FROM TO instruction When setting the network parameter with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction read write cyclic data with FROM TO instruction Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 Set this parameter with GX Developer or sequence program TO instruction QJ61BT11N Set this parameter with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Newly set the parameter with GX Developer or the dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction 1 2 Up to 4 modules can be set when setting with GX Developer Specify Remote net Ver 1 mode or Remote I O net mode for the mode Automatic refresh parameter Perform
209. es a Link special relay SB Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Number A AnS series Q series MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module Compat Precautions for ibility replacement Module status SB0020 SB0020 Baton pass status host 5 0047 5 0047 Data link status of each aoa 580049 580049 station Baton pass status of ee ad 5 0070 580070 each station Cyclic transmission es 580074 580074 status of each station b Link special register SW Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Number A AnS series Q series MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module Compat Precautions for ibility replacement Baton pass status of each station Cyclic transmission status of each station SW0070 to SW0073 SW0070 to SW0073 SW0074 to 5 0077 SW0074 to SW0077 2 a Link special relay SB O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for QnA QnAS series Q series ibility replacement MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module Module status 5 0020 5 0020 Baton pass status host 5 0047 5 0047 Data link status of each i 580049 580049 station Baton pass status of 5 0070 5 0070 each station Cyclic transmission n SB0074 SB0074 status of each station 5 46 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 RE
210. et Maximum number of networks to PLC networks and to PLC networks and A Alternate them with unused remote networks remote networks network Nos Maximum number of groups 9 Number of stations connected 64 stations Control station 1 normal station 63 network SI optical cable H PCF optical cable i n Broad band H PCF optical cable QSI optical cable Overall distance 30km SI optical cable 500m Distance between stations HERCI optical cable Ikm i i Broad band H PCF optical cable 1km o QSI optical cable 1km Error control system CRC X6 X12 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Prevention of system down switching the control RAS function O station Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions N N communication e g N N communication e g For comparison of dedicated 2 eee monitor program up monitor program up D Transient transmission A link instruction refer to download download A Section 4 6 2 Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 32 points per slot I O 32 points per slot Number of occupied I O i P assignment special 32 assignment intelli 32 O points points points 4 REPLACEME
211. ets the mode for operation P Mode select switch reverse loop test in the GX 2 self diagnostics test coaxial bus modules Switch name self diagnostics test Developer network parameters Comparison between MELSECNET B modules and MELSECNETIH optical loop and Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description MELSECNET B module MELSECNET H module Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Station number 5 Sets the station number Sets the station number setting switch Set the station to station test and forward loop Sets the mode for operation or Sets the mode for operation or P Mode select switch reverse loop test in the GX self diagnostics test self diagnostics test Developer network parameters Communication 5 TE Sets the communication speed A The setting is not required speed setting switch 3 Comparison between MELSECNET B modules MELSECNET H twisted bus modules Switch name Station number O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description MELSECNET B module MELSECNET H module A station number is set using the Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Sets the station number station number mode setting setting switch switch A self diagnostic test is set using Sets the mode for operation or Mode select s
212. f 1024 bytes MELSECNET 10 mode MELSECNET H mode LY LB 8 2 x LW lt 2000 bytes MELSECNET H extended mode LY LB 8 2x LW 35840 bytes When the number of bytes exceeds 2000 mount two modules having the same network No or set all modules on the network in the MELSECNET H extended mode Communication speed 125kbps 250kbps 500kbps 1Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps Number of stations connected in one network 32 stations master station 1 local station remote I O station 31 64 stations control station 1 normal station 63 Set the remote network to a separate network 32 stations control station 1 normal station 31 Set the remote network to a separate network Applicable cable Shielded twisted pair cable SI optical cable H PCF optical cable Broad band H PCF optical cable QSI optical cable A new optical cable has to be installed 3C 2V A new coaxial cable has to 5C 2V be installed 30km 125kbps 1200m 250kbps 600m Either use AGBR10 500kbps 400m 300 AGBERIO DC type repeater 1Mbps 200m 5C 2V 500m unit or configure a separate network When 1200 m is required Refer to Section ie Gl optical cables for all 425kbps 1200 222 optical cables and use id EE QJ71LP21G as the Distance between 250kbps 600m module stations 500kbps 400m Either use AGBR10 1Mbps 200m
213. f 3 tier ln T isl master station L1 m 100 180 200 280 z M Li m L2 2 Concept of MELSECNET Il 3 tier system replacement Step 1 Control station 1Mp3 setting Replace the link parameter setting of MELSECNET Il 2 tier master station directly with Network range assignment Common parameters of MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 Step 2 Gateway station 1Ns1 2Mp3 setting Data transfer between 2 and 3 tier performed automatically on MELSECNET 11 should be set with parameter setting on MELSECNET AH Perform the following settings Replace the link parameter setting of MELSECNET 11 3 tier master station directly with Network range assignment Common parameters of MELSECNET H network 2 control station 2Mp3 The range assignment should be performed including the same LB LW size as that of 1Mp3 to relay the network 1 control station 1Mp3 Set Refresh parameters not to duplicate B W of networks 1 and 2 on the CPU Set data transfer between 2 and 3 tier of MELSECNET II in Interlink transmission parameters between gateway stations 1Ns1 and 2Mp3 Step 3 Normal station 1Ns2 2Ns1 2Ns2 setting Set Refresh parameters of each normal station 1Ns2 2Ns1 2Ns2 on MELSECNET H networks 1 and 2 2 27 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following shows the flow of MELSECNET H link data after being replaced from MELSECNET ll Flow of LB LW link da
214. ffers Mus dn Modulation method CMI method Encoding method Manchester code 1 1 the Transmission HDLC standards frame format format CRC 6 12 5 1 and retry by a time over system The loopback function cannot Loop back function due to error be used on a coaxial bus RAS function Pinon cable Diagnostic function for checking local system Diagnostic function for checking link lines To use the loopback function local link lines using an optical loop system is recommended Master station When the master station is Number of occupied CPU integrated type 0 point Master station replaced from a CPU 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli points Standalone 32 points per slot I O 32 points integrated type one new slot assignment special 32 points 32 points is required 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 3 Comparison between MELSECNET B module twisted pair and MELSECNET H module optical loop coaxial bus Specifications MELSECNET B module MELSECNET H module Twisted pair Optical loop QJ71LP21 25 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Coaxial bus QJ71BR11 Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Max 2048 points and max number of XY points of CPU module on master 8192 points station 16384 points
215. for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A series programmable controllers 5 series Generic term for A series and AnS series QnA series Abbreviation for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC QnA series programmable controllers QnAS series Abbreviation for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC QnA series programmable controllers QnA QnAS series Generic term for QnA series and QnAS series A AnS QnA QnAS series Q series Generic term for A series AnS series QnA series and QnAS series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers BCPU module type CPU module Generic term for A series AnS series QnA series QnAS series and Q series CPU modules Basic model QCPU Generic term for the QOOCPU and Q01CPU High Performance model QCPU Generic term for the QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU This handbook mainly explains about the 002 Q02HCPU QO6HCPU and Q12HCPU Process CPU Generic term for the QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU Universal model QCPU Generic term for the QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU This handbook mainly explains about the 000 QOOUCPU Q01UCPU 020
216. fore changing the sequence program 2 70 MELSECNET II MELSECNET H Reference Instruction s Instruction Category Description Category Description name name manual Other station Reads device data on other Section The master station SREAD word device read stations of target network No 7 4 5 Reading from reads the word LRDP j Reads device data on other local station devices T C D W Other station Section ZNRD stations of target network No on local stations word device read PA 7 4 5 by A compatible instructions Other station Writes data to devices on WRITE Section word device other stations of target The master station SWRITE 7 4 5 write network No Writing to local writes to the word 5 LWTP Writes data to devices on station devices T C D W Other station A other stations of target Section on local stations ZNWR word device network A compatible 7 4 5 write instructions The following describes operation by the instructions Execution station Instruction Name Description Can be used x Cannot be used Target station QCPU QnAS AnUS H Reads CPU device data on target stations of target network No in 16 bit units ROMS CPU ___ Network module Networkmodue CPU Other Channel 1
217. forward loop 4 Online 25Mbps Substitute the forward loop 4 Loop test reverse loop Self loopback test 25Mbps reverse loop test for the station Mode setting 5 Station to station test 6 Internal self loopback test to station test Switch master station 25Mbps Check network No group No 6 Station to station test 7 Hardware test 25Mbps and station No in GX Developer slave station Using QJ72LP25G and network diagnostics host 7 Self loopback test QJ72BR15 information 8 Internal self loopback test Sets the mode 9 H W test j Setting range F Station No check 0 Online 1 Self loopback test 2 Internal self loopback test 3 Hardware test Condition Nothing to be noted for the Sets the operation conditions A setting switch MELSECNET H 5 38 5 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 5 Parameter Comparisons 1 A AnS series a Parameter of remote master station Parameter name Network parameter 5 39 Description series MELSECNET 10 module O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q series MELSECNET H module Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Network type Network type Starting I O No Starting I O No Network 240 to No 255 cannot be set Network No Netw
218. function from M 8192 points A MELSECNET H This is new function from Number of device SM 2048 points A MELSECNET H pont P remote This is a new function from station D 12288 points A MELSECNET H This is new function from SD 2048 points A MELSECNET H Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token bus method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method Manchester code Transmission method Single bus Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Maximum number of 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote networks networks O Number of stations 33 stations Remote master station 1 Remote connected in one network station 32 4 9 3C 2V Applicable cable 5C 2V Overall distance oe 5 2 500 Distance between stations 24 5 2 500 Error control system X 6 X12 X5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS function M Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up download etc with 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated Transient transmission peripheral device Mosis program upr A link instruction refer to Section Intelligent function download etc 562 modules applica
219. gateway station Select a model based on the existing MELSECNET II system configuration and the newly added MELSECNET 10 system configuration If the system configuration does not apply to any gateway set models in the list select and purchase each module for base part MELSECNET II part and MELSECNET 10 part individually and then set them up as a gateway station of gateway set models Set model MELSECNET II B MELSECNET 10 Q6KT NETGW SS A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71QLP21 KT NETGW R A1SJ71QLP21 GE 2 A1SJ71AR21 2 Q6KT NETGW RB 1535 1561 Q2ASCPU A1SJ71QBR11 KT NETGW T A1SJ71QLP21 20 CUM A1SJ71AT21B S Q6KT NETGW TB A1SJ71QBR11 1 Network type 2 Network type MELSECNET 10 Q6KT NETGW S SI optical fiber cable double loop S SI optical fiber cable double loop Coaxial cable double loop B Coaxial cable bus How to read model name Gateway set 1 2 T Twisted pair cable bus 6 5 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH 6 3 Precautions for Use of Gateway Set 1 Link data and function The following shows link data and function Item Detailed description MELSECNET II to MELSECNET 10 2000 bytes MELSECNET 10 to MELSECNET lI first half 1024 bytes second half 1024 bytes Cyclic data LB LW Cyclic data LX LY link special relay register and transient tr
220. ge gt 0 Online Offline Loop test forward loop Loop test reverse loop Station to station test master station Station to station test slave station Self loopback test Internal self loopback test H W test Network No check Group No check Station No check o fk ON Sets the mode lt Setting range gt 0 Online 1 Self loopback test 2 Internal self loopback test 3 hardware test Set offline loop test and station to station test in GX Developer network parameters Check network No group No and station No in GX Developer network diagnostics host information Condition setting Switch Sets the operation conditions This switch cannot make parameter setting Set in GX Developer network parameters 4 19 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 5 Parameter Comparisons 1 A AnS series a Parameter of control station Parameter name Network parameter 4 20 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description series MELSECNET 10 module Q series MELSECNET H module MELSECNET 10 mode Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Network type Network type O Starting I O No Starting I O No Network No 240 to No 255 cannot be Network No Network No A ah Altern
221. ging to a wire saving e network by using CC Link or CC Link LT 1Ns1 1Ns2 A is also recommended for remote I O stations Twisted Coaxial bus Tm Network 1 Network 2 Twisted Coaxial bus 1 1Ns 2R3 1 10 1 INTRODUCTION d 3 tier system 1 System configuration example using local stations only MELSECNET B MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loop o Network 1 1Ns2 2MP4 Network 2 e New installation The installation has to be changed for an optical loop system or a coaxial bus system Coaxial bus Network 1 Twisted 1Ns2 2Mp4 1Ns3 NA Network 2 9969 Twisted using existing cables gt Network 1 Existing cables Process the terminals for se ah ae ik MELSECNET H connection Network 2 Twisted using CC Link dedicated cables Network 1 p New installation Change the cables to CC 1Ns2 2Mp4 Link dedicated cables Network 2 1 11 1 INTRODUCTION e 3 tier system 2 System configuration example using 2 tier local stations and 3 tier remote I O stations MELSECNET B MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loop Network 1 Twisted 1 52 2 New installation The installation has to be rt Network
222. gisters Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions N N communication N N communication e g monitor program e g monitor program For comparison of dedicated Transient transmission up download up download link instruction refer to Dedicated link Dedicated link Section 4 6 2 instruction instruction Voltage 20 4VDC to 31 2VDC 20 4VDC to 31 2VDC 0 2 0 20 External power A supply Applicable Cables of 1 25mm or more 10 75 to 2mm 0 3 to 1 25mm should be replaced with cable size cables of 0 3 to 1 25mm 48 points 2 slots 32 points per slot I O I O assignment first half Set the Empty 16 points of Number of occupied I O assignment special 32 empty 16 points A first half to the Empty 0 point i points second half intelli 32 with I O assignment points Performance comparison of AJ71QLP21G QJ71LP21G Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK Compat Precautions for QJ71LP21G po AJ71QLP21G ibility replacement MELSECNET 10 mode Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points O network 8192 points Maximum number of link 8 2 x W lt 2000 bytes points station Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method
223. guarantee function handshaking is performed between CPU modules and network modules to refresh the network and enables data separation prevention of cyclic data per station The per station block guarantee function is enabled when Secured data send and Secured data receive in the following parameters are set MELSECNET 10H supplementary settings Constant scan Aes Sobel of low speed cyclic transmission Maximum No of retums to am r system stations in 1 scan Station With multiplex transmission There is a data link through the sub controlling station when the controlling station is down Secured data send Secured data receive Transient setting Maximum No of transients in 1 2 Times scan Maximum No of transients in 2 Times one station b BW first half second half assignments in the MELSECNET II mode and composite mode Set the station inherent parameters of the MELSECNET H to all stations to re use MELSECNET II sequence programs more efficiently Note however that as the station inherent parameter setting functions cannot be used on basic models Q00JCPU 00 Q01CPU use the Device block replacement function to change the devices in the first and second half settings to continuous numbers c Processing time The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A AnS QnA QnAS series and the Q series For details on processing times refer to the manual for the
224. hanged or an error has occurred in a module When the switch setting is changed turn the power supply of programmable controller system OFF gt ON or reset the programmable controller CPU Data link stop restart The stop and restart of data link is available during the data link execution Automatic return function The module disconnected from data link by the power supply off etc can automatically return to data link when restored to the normal status Slave station detach function The module that cannot perform data link due to the power supply off etc is disconnected and data link is kept with normal modules only Data link status check SB SW Data link status can be checked This check can be used for the interlock etc of sequence program To next page 8 5 9 REPLACEMENT OF CC LINK Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N Precautions for replacement Offline test The following tests can be performed Hardware test Standalone module operation check Line test Module connection status check Parameter check test Parameter setting check The following tests can be performed Hardware test Standalone module operation check Line test Module connection status check The specification method of hardware test line test differs For details on the specification met
225. haracteristics deterioration Apply the rated voltage to the aluminum electrolytic capacitor for several hours to activate it Or rotate products at the periodic inspection in every 1 to 2 years Reference The life of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor even if not used under a normal temperature decreases approximately at 1 4 speed of the case when it is energized App 1 Appendix 2 Related Manuals Appendix 2 1 Replacement handbooks 1 Transition guide M b anual name anual number large AnS small 1 MELSEC A QnA Series Transition Guide L NA 08077E 2 MELSEC AnS QnAS Series Transition Guide L NA 08236E x 2 Transition from MELSEC A QnA large type to series handbook Target M large AnS small Manual name Manual number Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series L 08043ENG 1 Handbook Fundamentals Transition from MELSEC AnS QnAS Small Type Series to Q L 080219ENG x Series Handbook Fundamentals Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series L 08046ENG x 2 Handbook Intelligent Function Modules Transition fi MELSEC AnS QnAS Small T Series t ransition from nS QnAS Small Type Series to Q L 08220ENG d Series Handbook Intelligent Function Modules Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large AnS QnAS 3 L 08048ENG Small Series to Series Handbook
226. he CPU As Interlink transmission parameters parameter the gateway station 1Ns1 2Mp3 is set for do not set a station inherent parameter Step 3 Inter link data transfer setting of gateway station 1Ns1 2Mp3 Data transfer between 2 and 3 tier which is performed automatically on MELSECNET Il is performed by Inter link data transfer on gateway station 1Ns1 2Mp3 LB LW area shared by networks 1 and 2 is set by Interlink transmission parameters parameter of gateway station between 1Ns1 and 2Mp3 Step 4 Station setting other than gateway stations 1Ns2 2Ns1 2Ns2 Station inherent parameter and Refresh parameters of stations excluding gateway stations 1Ns2 2Ns1 2Ns2 are set Set Station inherent parameter of network 1 normal station 1Ns2 as the same setting as that of network 1 control station 1Mp3 Set Station inherent parameter of network 2 normal station 2Ns2 as the same setting as that of network 2 normal station 2Ns1 Set Refresh parameter to refresh all area of common parameters assigned on control stations 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC Data flow between each station of MELSECNET H is shown at next page Flow of LB LW link data B W 0 100 180 200 280 380 400 500 580 600 680 TTF 1FFF Network1 CPU 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 1Ns2 Empty 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 1Ns2 Station inherent parameter MELSECNET H
227. hipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind
228. hod Points Start Monitoring time 2001 x 10ms Parameter name Start End fom 4 Switch screens LE L w settings cA Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Jp EN GEM LB speed LW Pairing ee wa foma Stat End 0000 512 0000 O1FF Disable 0200 O3FF 0200 O3FF Disable EN i E se d 2 19 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Station inherent parameter Set the first half in Setting1 and the second half in Setting2 as the inherent parameters Station inherent parameter QOGHCPU MELSECNET H control station Setup common and Station inherent parameters Assignment method C Points Start Monitoring time 2001 10ms Parameter name In Switch screens settings Start End Disable J Disable Disable 4 Refresh parameters Refresh parameters QO6HCPU MELSECNET H control station Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold 0000 DIFF 4 0000 Assignment method Points Start Start End L 1 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC S c MELSECNET H normal station 1 Network parameter setting The network parameter settings of MELSECNET H normal stations QO2HCPU the same as th
229. hod refer to the manual Check the set parameter in GX Developer network parameters Parameter registration function The following two types of parameters are set using the sequence program TO instruction or dedicated instructions Network parameter Automatic refresh parameter The following two types of parameters are set using GX Developer Network parameter Automatic refresh parameter Change from the parameter settings in the sequence program TO instruction or with dedicated instructions to the parameter settings with GX Developer Scan synchronous function Synchronous mode Data link with scan synchronized with sequence program is available Asynchronous mode Data link not synchronized with sequence program is available Standby master function Data link can be continuously performed by switching to the standby master station at the master station error Dedicated instruction RIRD RIWT RIRCV RISEND RIFR RITO Transient transmission to intelligent device station and local station is available using dedicated instructions Change the sequence program as instruction formats differ Remote net mode Communication is available for master station and remote I O station only Delete RRPA instruction and set parameters with GX Developer Temporary error invalid station specify function Module replacement is available without detecting erro
230. ing CC Link dedicated cables New installation Change the cables to CC Link dedicated cables OO b 2 tier system 2 System configuration example using remote I O stations only MELSECNET B MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loop Twisted o 1 New installation The installation has to be changed for an optical loop system or coaxial bus system 2 Wire saving Changing to a wire saving Coaxial bus network by using CC Link or CC Link LT R1 R2 R3 is also recommended Network 1 1R1 1R2 1R3 1 INTRODUCTION c 2 tier system 3 System configuration example using local stations remote I O stations MELSECNET B MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loop Network 2 oe 1 4 2 1 New installation The installation has to Coaxial bus be changed for an optical loop system or coaxial bus system 1 4 2 2 Composite system As a mixture of a PLC Network 1 Network 2 Twisted to PLC network and a remote I O network 2R3 is not allowed on the Q series the network has to be divided into two Twisted Optical loop networks having different network Nos For this reason a separate network module for remote master station is i required Network 1 Twisted 3 Wire saving Chan
231. ing describes the network parameter settings of MELSECNET 1 2 tier local station L1 3 tier master station m A3UCPU 1 Network parameter setting MELSECNET II 2 tier local station L1 3 tier master station m Module No 1 Module No 2 Module No 3 Module No 4 Network type MNET II Local station MNET Master station X Start 1 0 No 0000 20 S E Tata salons ay Newoekmmessgmet Refresh parameters Necessary setting No setting Already set Setifitismeeded No setting Already set 4 Valid module Start 1 0 No during other station access fi zi Jntetink transmission parameters Input the start 1 0 No installed in the module in 16 point unit Acknowledge assignment Routing parameters Check End Cancel 2 Network range assignment ASUCPU MELSECNET II 3 tier master station m Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End ee 2 Switch screens JLB LW settings n Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station 4 station No Monitoring time 200 10ms First half LB First half L a Second half LB Second half L w Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat MO X 128 mo mz 128
232. ink refresh B W 0 100 180 20027F 3FF Network2 2Mp3 CPU i 2Ns1 2 52 1Mp3 2 3 1 i Designation of arrow in the figure Cyclic communication p adi Transfers LB LW which has been set on common parameter to Cyclic all stations of MELSECNET H by cyclic communication communication Inter link data transfer gt Inter link data transfer from module 1to 2 Transferes LB LW between modules with 4 Inter link data transfer from module 2 to 1 different network numbers mounted to one CPU Link refresh Transfers LB LW of MELSECNET H to the device of CPU 2 28 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC Network parameter setting is required for control and normal stations on MELSECNET H The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET H Stati Common parameter sik Refresh parameter Inter link data transfer Network range assignment parameter 1Mp3 e Refer to example in e 2 Refer to example in e 3 1Ns2 Refer to example f 2 1Ns1 o Refer to example in g 2 Refer to example in h 1 2Mp3 o o Refer to example in g 3 Refer to example in g 4 2Ns1 Refer to example i 2 2Ns2 Refer to example i 2 O Setting required A Setting required Default setting is also a
233. ink status of other station Data link status of other station Delete the sequence program of the section Module reset acceptance corresponding to the function Xn4 Prohibited to use x When the switch setting is changed turn the power complete supply of programmable controller system OFF gt ON or reset the programmable controller CPU Xn5 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Data link startup by buffer Xn6 memory parameter normal completion Data link startup by buffer Xn7 memory parameter error completion 2 Delete the sequence program of the section Xn8 Data link startup by corresponding to the function and set parameters parameter normal completion with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction Xn9 Data link startup by EPROM RLPASET instruction parameter error completion Parameter registration to XnA 2 E PROM normal completion Parameter registration to XnB 2 E PROM error completion XnC Prohibited to use Prohibited to use XnD E PROM erasure normal Delete the sequence program of the section completion Prohibited to use A corresponding to the function and set parameters XE EPROM erasure abnormal with GX Disveldpsrar with dedicated instruction completion RLPASET instruction XnF Module ready Module ready 1 0 1 1 1 2 X n 1 3 X n 1 4 X n 1 5 X n 1 6 1 7 T Prohibited to use Prohibited to use 1 8 X n 1 9 X n 1 A X n 1 B X n 1 C X n 1
234. ison between AJ72LP25 and QJ72LP25 25 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat 2 55 Precautions for replacement AJ72LP25 QJ72LP25 25 ibility Maximum number LX LY 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points network LW 8192 points 16384 points lt Remote station gt Remote I O station gt Maximum number of link remote master station gt remote master station 2 points per station LX LB 8 2 LW S LX LB 8 2 x LW S 1600 bytes 1600 bytes Max number of I O points Doin per remote I O station pans O This is new function from M 8192 points A MELSECNET H N mberof devise SM 2048 points This is a new function from vi i MELSECNETIH points remote station D 12288 points This is new function from i i P MELSECNETIH This is a new function from SD 2048 points A MELSECNET H Communication speed 10Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network 240 to No 255 7 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC Maximum number of cannot be set to PLC networks and to PLC ne
235. isting cable 2 optical fiber cable Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications A AnS QnA QnAS series Q series Precautions for MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module ibility replacement optical loop optical loop GI optical fiber cabe m _ m O _ oo 2 Coaxial cable a Overall distance O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications A AnS QnA QnAS series Q series Compat Precautions for MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module ibility replacement Coaxial bus Coaxial loop Coaxial bus 3C 2V 300m 19 2km 300m A Refer to below 5C 2V 500m 30km 500m A Refer to below 1 When the overall distance does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications either use AGBR10 A6BR10 DC type repeater unit in the network or configure a separate network b Distance between stations Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications A AnS QnA QnAS series Q series Precautions for MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module ibility replacement Coaxial bus Coaxial loop Coaxial bus Som O Bom fom sm 1 o 5 29 5 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK S The following shows the extension method when a repeater unit for the AGBR10 AGBR10 DC type MELSECNET 10 coaxial bus system is used For details refer
236. it Suita cler station eccers Acknowledge assignment Routing parameters End Cancel Network range assignment BW settings Q2ASCPU L3 1Mp1 Setup common and station inherent parameters Assignment method C Points Statt Monitoring time 200 10ms Parameter name Start End 2 Switch screens gw setting 1000 11FF 1000 11FF J 1200 12FF 1200 12FF rmm A Module 1 local station refresh parameter Transient transmission error history status Overwrite C Hold Assignment method Points Start Start End 6 s 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH c Module 2 MNET 10 control station refresh parameter Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold Assignment method Points Start Start End d Inter link data transfer module 1 Since all points cannot be transferred from MELSECNET II to MELSECNET 10 narrow down the data to be relayed by setting priorities Assignment method Points Start Start End Module 1 gt 2 Module 2 gt 1 e From MELSECNET 10 to MELSECNETI II Assignment method Points Start Start End Module 1 2 Module 2 gt 1 6 9 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH 6 5 Communication Between Existing ACPU in MELSECNET II and Added QCPU Using Gateway Set Data Transmission Reception by Sequence Program
237. k remote master station gt remote master station 2 points per station LX LB 8 2 x LW S LX LB 8 2 LW S 1600 bytes 1600 bytes X Y 2048 points X Y 4096 points per remote I O station n m 3 This is new function from 134 points MELSECNETIH 6 This is a new function from Number of device SM 2048 points MELSECNETIH ponis enot This is a new function from station D 12288 points A MELSECNETIH This is new function from MELSECNETIH Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network 240 to No 255 255 Total number of PLC cannot be set to PLC networks and remote I O networks 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and A remote I O networks Maximum number of networks Alternate them with unused network Nos 65 stations Remote master 65 stations Remote master Number of stations station 1 remote I O station 1 remote I O connected network 4 station 64 station 64 Applicable cable GI optical cable Overall distance 30km Distance between stations optical cable 2km Error control system CRC 6 2 5 1 and
238. k reviewing the network parameter and program is required Section 2 5 3 Section 2 5 4 Extensibility By simultaneous replacement to the MELSECNET 10 an arbitrary station can be replaced with the QCPU If modification on software is required modifying parameters and a program at addition of the first module allows data link At addition of the second module or later data link is possible by only changing the existing network parameter according to the added station 1 Twisted pair cables be used by replacing the remote station with a normal station and configuring a PLC to PLC network 1 23 1 INTRODUCTION b Adding the QCPU using gateway set This method relays using gateway set when the QCPU is added and shares link data Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration Add a relay station Item Advantage Outline Reference Since a relay station is added cable laying change is 1st required stage a Newly laying between the relay station and the added Cable QCPU is required 5 5 2 eo Section 6 1 laying Change to the existing side is 2nd unnecessarily Cost on T stage Data link is possible by only changing laying due to station added to the MELSECNET 10 1st Network stage Adding gateway set as the relay station is required Section 6 1 dule 2nd Section 6 2 t Data link is possible
239. k type A AnS series Alternative models for Q series 21 QJ71NT11B Twisted bus 1 Twisted pair MSJ71AT21B QJ71LP21 25 Optical loop SI cable supported QJ71BR11 Coaxial bus 1 Supported by the QCPU only A system including A AnS QnA QnAS series module cannot be configured The twisted bus system can be employed for a PLC to PLC network but not for a remote I O network 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons 2 2 1 Module performance comparisons 1 Comparison between MELSECNET Il module optical loop and MELSECNET H module optical loop a SI optical fiber cable H PCF optical fiber cable O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET Il module MELSECNET H module Optical loop Optical loop QJ71LP21 25 Compat M Precautions for replacement ibility MELSECNET 10 mod Max 2048 points and max number of 1 mode O points of CPU module on master P MELSECNET H extended mode 8192 station points Maximum MELSECNET mode 1024 points MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points number of MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET H mode link points MELSECNET II composite mode MELSECNET H extended mode per network 4096 points 16384 points MELSECNET mode 1024 points MELSECNET 10 mode 8
240. l 2 Network range assignment MELSECNET II 2 tier master station M Setup common parameters r Assignment methad Points Start Total slave gt Start End pt ane Switch screens Lew settings Send range for each station Send range for each Send range for each station Send range for each station 4 S No Monitoring time 2001 X 1 ms half LB First half Lw Second half LB Second half L w Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Start ET EM o 384 0100 384 0100 027 384 0500 067F 0500 067 3 Refresh parameter MELSECNET II 2 tier master station r Assignment method Points Start Start End Ponts Stat Erd e Sa LB lt gt B transmission 1 21920 Transient transmission error history status verwrite Hold Lw 2W transmission 1 LX LY X Y transmission b MELSECNET II 2 tier local station L2 As the cyclic communication is performed according to the network range assignments of the 2 tier master station A3UCPU there is no parameter setting for network range assignment on 2 tier local stations 2 47 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC MELSECNET II 2 tier local station L1 3 tier master station m gateway station The follow
241. l modules REMFR Jatargetremote I O remote station 7 1 1 station mounted on remote station intelligent intelligent function I O stations function module modules The master station Writing data to Writes data to Writing data writes data to buffer memory on buffer memory on esc ection RTOP to remote I O special modules REMTO remote I O station a target remote I O 744 station mounted on remote intelligent function station intelligent I O stations modules function module The following describes operation by the instructions Can be used x Cannot be used Execution Target station Instruction Name station Description Remote I O module Reads data from buffer memory on a target remote I O station intelligent function module Reading from Remote Intelligent buffer memory CPU Master module module function module on remote Buffer memory REMFR L REMFRIA Channel 2 n station o Ye S 1 1 4 221 intelligent Channel 5 i function module Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 n Writes data to buffer memory on a target remote I O station intelligent function module Writing to buffer Remote Intelligent memory on CPU Mastermodue module function module remote Channel 1
242. l stations For the stations not to be replaced with a Q series system replace the MELSECNET II B data link modules with the MELSECNET 10 network modules 3 Replacement of an A AnS series system in stages The A AnS series system is replaced with a Q series system in stages to shift the system to a Q series system 1 INTRODUCTION 2 Transition procedure 2 addition of gateway station MELSECNET II MELSECNET B MELSECNET 10 gateway stations are added on to shift the system to a MELSECNET 10 system in stages a Example of replacing some A series programmable controllers in an existing system with Q series programmable controllers A gateway station is introduced into a part of the A AnS series system System before transition to shift the system to System after transition a Q series system MELSECNET B MELSECNET B 9 9 9 9 09 9 9 9 6 A gateway station is introduced into a part of the A AnS series system to shift the system to System before transition a Q series system System after transition 1 For the stations replaced with the Q series the system is built with MELSECNET 10 2 The above MELSECNET 10 system is connected to the B system with the gateway station Master station Qn MNET I O MELSECNET 1 Local station MELSECNET 10 Nor
243. l stations loop error SB0095 Reverse loop normal status ON Faulty station present 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 Local station special relay Special relays enabled when host station is the local station Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Special relay in th f MELSECNET Il local per Dey en 22500 Hope MELSECNETIH special relay station Precautions for ibility replacement Description Number Description Delete when used ina M9204 LRDP instruction OFF Not completed None _ sequence program complete ON Completed Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions Delete when used in a M9205 LWTP instruction OFF Not completed Rane _ P sequence program complete ON Completed Refer to Section 2 6 2 Transient instructions Link card error for OFF Normal OFF Normal M9211 local station ON Abnormal 280020 Module status ON Abnormal o OFF Online ON Offline station OFF Online M9240 Link status to station test 5 0043 Online switch ON Other than self loopback test When ON confirm the loop status SWO090 OFF Normal OFF Normal The loop status can M9241 Forward loop error ON Abnormal SB0090 Host loop status ON Abnormal also be judged by the host station bits of SW0091 to SW0094 When ON confirm the loop status by SW0090 OF
244. li ONN occupied Standalone 32 points per slot I O 32 points integrated type an additional points assignment special 32 points slot 32 points is required 2 5 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Comparison between MELSECNET B module twisted pair and MELSECNET H module optical loop coaxial bus O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET B module MELSECNET H module Twisted pair 2048 points and max number of I O points of CPU module on master station Coaxial bus QJ71BR11 Optical loop QJ71LP21 25 MELSECNET 10 mode MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET H extended mode 8192 points Precautions for replacement MELSECNET mode 1024 points MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET II composite mode 4096 points MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET H extended mode 16384 points X Y Maximum number of link points per network MELSECNET mode 1024 points MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET II composite mode 4096 points MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points MELSECNET H mode MELSECNET H extended mode 16384 points Maximum number of link points per station MELSECNET mode 1024 bytes e MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II composite mode Link parameter first half 1024 bytes Link parameter second hal
245. li Number Description Number Description x OFF Not being executed ON F 41 Offline testi ee OFF No response M9252 Loop test status test reverse SBOOAE response ON Response loop test designation execution underway ER OEF E or STEP 50084 Each station Stores the CPU RUN M9253 to CPU RUN status of each station operation status ON STOP SW0087 status Including the host PAUSE 9 OFF All stations are Al Santons Are in the RUN or in the RUN or STEP RUN Other station status Fach station stalus M9254 5 0084 RUN ON Station in the operation status Any station in the STOP status STOP or i PAUSE status PAUSE status z exist including exist the host OFF All stations are OFF All stations executing data Other station normal transmission linking 9255 communication ON Any error SB0074 ON Stations that status of each status station are not 22 station identified executing data linking exist b Link special register SW AnN AnA AnSCPU MELSECNET 10 module Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QCPU MELSECNET H module Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Number Description Number Description Host station Stores the station Stores the station D9243 i i number number of the host Station NG number of the host
246. lic data sending station and cyclic data receiving station The following shows an example of an interlock program for handshaking When handling data larger than two words 32 bits at one time without using the 32 bit data guarantee function or the block guarantee per station function the data may split into new and old data coexisting in one word 16 bits units As in the example below the program should be interlocked using the oldest number of either the link relay B Sending station Receiving station 1 2 4 5 WO BO 8100 B100 BWOV DO wo h BV wo 0100 K3 3 SET SET B100 8100 7 e ME RST B100 1 The send command turns on 2 The contents of DO to D2 are stored in WO to W2 3 Upon completion of storage in WO to W2 BO for handshaking turns on 4 By cyclic transmission the link relay B is sent after the link register W which turns on BO of the receiving station 5 The contents of WO to W2 are stored in D100 to D102 6 Upon completion of storage in D100 to D102 B100 for handshaking turns on 7 When the data is transmitted to the receiving station BO turns off 2 73 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 Per station block guarantee function When the interlock program using BW in 1 cannot be made use the per station block guarantee function for MELSECNET H cyclic data By enabling the per station block
247. line test OFF Not instructed M9227 Loop test status test reverse SB00AC ne res instruction status Instructed loop test execution underway OFF All stations RUN or STEP OFF RUN or STEP EU 1 Local station RUN status Each station CPU M9232 5 0084 ON Stati in th operation status ON STOP or PAUSE RUN status ee o status STOP or PAUSE status exist Local station error OFF No error Can be substituted by M9233 N detection status ON Error detection 5 0074 OFF No station detected Local station parameter remote I O station OFF No error Parameter status errors M9235 5 007 parameter error ON Error detection of each station ON A station detection status detected parameter errors OFF Parameter Local station OFF No communication remote I O station communication Parameter status not in progress initial ON Communication 3800 8 of each station ON Parameter o communications gt communication status in progress OFF All stations normal Local station Cyclictransmission ON Station where M9237 Normal 80074 status of each li remote station ON Abnormal sta us of eac cyclic mE error station transmission is not executing exist OFF All stations 80091 Forward loop normal Local station status ON Faulty station M9238 remote I O station OFF Normal present forward reverse ON Abnormal OFF Al
248. link instruction 32 points per slot 32 points per slot Number of occupied I O 2 I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelli 32 points points points 1 Remote master station gt remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 22 3 remote sub master station The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 4 Performance comparison of AJ71QLR21 A1SJ71QLR21 and QJ71BR11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ71QLR21 RAs QJ71BR11 ibility replacement A1SJ71QLR21 Maximum number X Y 8192 points O of link points 8192 points 16384 points network Ww 8192 points 16384 points Remote master station gt Remote I O station Y B 8 2 W S 1600 bytes Multiplexed remote master station lt gt multiplexed remote sub master station gt Y B 8 2 x W S 2000 bytes Maximum number of link points per station Communication speed 10Mbps Nothing to be noted though Communication method Token ring method Tok
249. ll at once Mount two modules for PLC to PLC network control station or normal station and remote network master station to the replaced QCPU and then replace remote stations all at once 3 Point 1 Parameter settings when the gateway station CPU does not have a control program When data transmission reception between the gateway station CPU and network module is not necessary data can be relayed only by setting network parameters and inter link data transfer parameters Refer to Section 6 4 2 Parameter settings when the cyclic transmission data is read to the gateway station CPU When the cyclic transmission data is read to the gateway station CPU the network parameter and inter link data transfer parameter depending on the setting contents sometimes do not match with the link refresh parameter In this case perform cyclic transmission data relay between and MELSECNET 10 by sequence program Refer to Section 6 5 3 Number of B W points assigned to one station Maximum points can be relayed are 1k bytes first half 1k bytes second half for MELSECNET II 2000 bytes for MELSECNET 10 For this reason cyclic data of entire network may not be relayed It is necessary to narrow down the range of cyclic data to be relayed by setting priorities 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH 6 2 List of Gateway Set Models The following list shows gateway set models for a
250. ltiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station To next page 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 Precautions for replacement Distance between stations SI optical cable 500m H PCF optical cable 1km Broad band H PCF optical cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km lt 10Mbps gt SI optical cable 500m optical cable 1km Broad band H PCF optical cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km lt 25Mbps gt SI optical cable 200m H PCF optical cable 400m Broad band H PCF optical cable 1km QSI optical cable 1km Use 10 Mbps when using SI optical cable and HPCF optical cable Error control system 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over RAS function Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Transient transmission Monitor program up download etc with peripheral device Dedicated link instruction 1 1 communication Monitor program up download etc Dedicated link instruction For comparison of dedicated link instruction refer to
251. m Dista between D GI optical cable 2km stations New MELSECNET H Maximum number 239 parameter of networks mandatory Communication method Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method Nothing to be noted though the communication method differs Transmission Duplex loop Modulation Nothing to be noted though method Encoding Modulation method CMI method Encoding method NRZI coding the modulation method method differs Transmission HDLC standards frame format format Error control CRC X16 X12 X5 1 and retry by a time over system RAS function loopback due to Sitat deiection Or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Number of CPU int ited type 0 point gt d Wh lacing fi CPU W 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli occupied Standalone 32 points per slot I O 32 points integrated type an additional points assignment special 32 points slot 32 points is required 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 Comparison between MELSECNET module coaxial loop and MELSECNET H module coaxial bus O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET II module MELSECNET H module Precautions for replacement Compat ibility Coaxial loop Coaxial bus QJ71BR11
252. m is recommended for using the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to 255 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC Maximum number of cannot be set to PLC networks and to PLC networks and A networks Alternate them with unused remote networks remote networks network Nos Up to 32 stations are available as the normal station of coaxial 65 stations Remote master 33 stations Remote master bus system Number of stations station 1 remote station 1 remote A Using the optical loop system connected in one network station 64 station 32 3 is recommended for connecting 33 normal stations or more Applicable cable dnd i 2 5C 2V o Using the optical loop system Overall distance sini do ii d or ABBR1O A6BR10 DC Vi i 5C 2V 30km 5C 2V 500m m repeater unit is recommended Distance between stations 5C 2V 500m O Error control system CRC 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over 1 Remote master station gt remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 52 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 32 stations of the remote
253. m the master remote master station station are used to read write used to read write the buffer the buffer memory of special Correct the RFRP RTOP memory of intelligent function function modules at remote instructions for reading modules at remote 4 O stations stations writing buffer memory on ions en Other stations are accessed intelligent function modules Transient transmission Other stations are accessed from GX Developer at remote I O stations to the from GX Developer connected to the master REMFR REMTO connected to the remote station instructions Refer to 2 master station The master station is Section 3 6 2 remote master station is accessed from GX Developer accessed from GX Developer connected to remote I O connected to remote stations stations Automatic return When disconnected remote I O station returns to normal function status it is automatically restored and the data link is resumed the case of an optical loop In the case of an optical loop System and coaxial loop System faulty parts are System faulty parts are disconnected when fault e g disconnected when fault e g Loopback function cable disconnection occurs cable disconnection occurs and normal operation is continued on operable stations as a result of the loopback and normal operation is continued on operabl
254. mal station Local station 3 At other stations the A AnS series system is used as it is 1 14 1 INTRODUCTION b Example of replacing with the Q series programmable controllers in stages to shift to a Q series system A gateway station is introduced to replace the system Replacement of the System before transition with a Q series Transition steps transition steps is System after transition system in stages performed in stages to replace the system with the Q series system MELSECNET B MELSECNET B gateway station MELSEC Q4 is introduced to NET 10 replace the system P with a Q series System before transition system in stages Transition steps 1 For the stations replaced with the Q series the system is built with MELSECNET 10 2 The above MELSECNET 10 system is connected to the MELSECNET II B system with the gateway station Qn MNET I O Master 10 station Normal station Local station p dad MELSECNET 10 station station MNET 1 0 A0 Local station Normal station 3 The A AnS series system is replaced with a series system in stages to replace the system with a series System 1 15 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 3 Transition to and addition of QCPU by utilizing existing network MEL
255. mber of slave stations Total number of slave stations A 52 maximum No setting Group No A Mandatory for the MELSECNET H 5 5 LX LY assignments on the control S2 8 2 station and normal stations o 5 LB LW assignments first half Station inherent parameter A 2 8 2 second half on the master station 8 2 Supplemental settings Secured data lt and local stations send 3 2 Supplemental settings Secured data 5 x 3 8 LX LY assignments on the control LX LY assignments the master station and normal stations station and local stations 2 master station specification A Mandatory on communications of LX LY Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Network type Network type Starting No Starting No E E Network No A Mandatory for the MELSECNET H o 8 No setting E Group No A Mandatory for the MELSECNET H 2 Station inherent parameter 2 Refresh parameters Refresh parameters O 54 This is set when the AnU AnUS H QnA QnASCPU is mounted 2 Applied when LB LW are set for both the first half second half MELSECNET II For details refer to Section 2 5 2 Example of changing parameters on 2 tier system This is the data separation prevention function for reading writing cyclic data of two words or more single operation For details refer to Section 2 7 Replacement Precautions
256. ment Refresh parameters Interrupt settings Return as control station 2 Network range assignment parameter Set the total number of points in the first half and second half for the common parameters Network range assignment QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H control station Setup common and Station inherent parameters Assignment method Points Start Monitoring time 200 x 10ms Parameter name Start End Total slave 3 Switch screens LB LW settings F stations Send range for each station Send range for each statio Send range for each statio Send range for each statio a LB qo Lw 0000 o1FF 512 0000 OFF Ens Ponts siat m LX 0200 02 256 0200 02 Disable 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Station inherent parameter Set the first half in Setting1 and the second half in Setting2 as the inherent parameters Station inherent parameter MELSECNET H control station Assignment method Points Start Start End Reference network range assignment Drive Path Project Reference Read Cancel Switch settings screens 0000 0300 0100 OFF ia 0200 2 0400 4 4 Refresh parameters Refresh parameters 06
257. ment Remote sub Remote sub common common master station master station PN parameter PP specification specification assignment Set with the PLC parameter of setting each remote station Supplemental Supplemental settings settings O Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Routing parameters Routing parameters 1 The multiplexed remote master station is the station type of the multiplex master system Only the following CPU modules support the multiplex master system Process CPU Redundant CPU 5 42 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK c Parameter of multiplexed remote sub master station Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Parameter Compat Bame QnA QnAS series Q series ibilit Precautions for replacement ibili MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module 4 Network type Network type Starting I O Starting I O No Network Network New parameter of MELSECNET H To enable the multiplexed remote Total number of slave stations A sub master station to control the remote I O station the setting is required The group No is not used in the Group No A remote I O network Set to 0 Set the mode in GX Developer Mode A network parameters Network Monitoring time A parameter BW setting A XY setting A Reserved New parameter of MEL
258. mission Latter half Start No 70 No of words Z1 Transfers W of the host station to the local module Latter half Y device transmission Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Transfers Y of the host station to the local module B device transmission First half Start No Z0 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Transfers B of the host station to the local module First half B device transmission Latter half Start No 70 No of words Z1 Divides the buffer memory address by 16 bits Transfers B of the host station to the local module Latter half T 8 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE 1 B AS THE LOCAL D2040 1 DMOV U20 BMOV 6102420 D2040 2 DMOV U20 6102420 502040 9 DMOV U20 BMOV G1024Z0 D2040 A DMOV U20 6102420 502040 7 DMOV MOV SFR U20 0633622 502040 4 DMOV MOV SFR U20 BMOV 659272 502040 5 DMOV MOV SFR U20 BMOV 0659272 502040 DMOV MOV SFR U20 BMOV 059272 D2040 D DMOV MOV SFR U20 BMOV 659272 7 9 K4X1000Z0 W1004 wozo W1006 wozo W1016 wozo W1018 wozo W1011 Z0 22 W100A 20 22 K4B0Z0 W100C Z0 22 K4B0Z0 W101C 20 22 K4B0Z0 W101E 20 22 4 070 20 21
259. model QCPUS do not also support the QA 1S extension base unit 1 16 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Example of replacing some A AnS series programmable controllers in an existing 1 17 system with Q series programmable controllers Replaced station Replace A AnS series programmable controllers with Q series programmable controllers System before transition System after transition Master station Q series programmable controller main base Qn 1 0 I O 1 0 Local station MELSECNET I e 156 Local station data link module Local station 1 INTRODUCTION 2 Example of adding Q series programmable controllers to an existing system Station to add Add Q series programmable controllers to A AnS series programmable controllers System before transition System after transition Master station Q series programmable controller main base 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 High Performance model QCPU VO 5608 Local station data link module MELSECNET Local station Local station Local station 1 18 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 4 Replacement selection points 1 19 The following is the main three methods to replace any one stations in the existing MELSECNET II with the QCPU or to add the QCPU in the
260. module Other Word device ZNWR station word n O O i i fi Fixed device write E 55 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 7 Replacement Precautions The following shows the replacement precautions when replacing MELSECNET 1 with MELSECNET H 1 Cables For details on precautions for optical cables and coaxial cables refer to Section 2 2 2 Cable performance comparisons 2 System configuration a System configuration using local stations and remote I O stations in MELSECNET mode MELSECNET II mode MELSECNET H system which is a composite system comprising local stations and remote stations provides high performance functions by making a separation between local stations and remote stations It therefore cannot be configured by a mixture of local stations and remote stations For this reason in a MELSECNET Il system when replacing a system which comprises a mixture of local stations and remote stations connected to a single master station with MELSEC H system the following system configuration is necessary Normal stations are connected to a single control station and remote stations are controlled by an additional remote master station the control station in a remote system is defined as the remote master station The following shows a system configuration example For a parameter change exampl
261. module Local station By mounting the local station data link module the QCPU replaced by the A AnSCPU can communicate as the local station without changing the existing network link assignment even after CPU replacement 3 Point For precautions of when connecting the QCPU as a local station refer to Section 1 1 3 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE MELSECNET II B AS THE LOCAL 2 Adding the QCPU to the existing network Example at Added station Adding the Q series programmable controller to the A series programmable controllers System after transition System before transition Master stati Q series programmable controller Straton main base unit Qn I O 1 O 1 0 1 0 Local station MELSECNET II QA1S6LB Local station data link module Local station Local station When the QCPU is added to the existing network it can communicate as the local station using the existing network link assignment by mounting the local station data link module EJ Point For precautions of when connecting the QCPU as a local station refer to Section 1 1 3 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE 1 B AS THE LOCAL 7 2 List of Local Station Data Link Module The following models are available to connect the QCPU with the existing MELSECNETV II B Select a model
262. module in T6 point uni Cue amen eren Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters End Cancel Network range assignment LX LY A3ACPU MELSECNET II composite master station Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End Monitoring time 2001 X 1 0ms aes E Switch screens settings Network range assignment first half LB LW settings A3ACPU MELSECNET II composite master station Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End Monitoring time 201 X 10ms Toa seve Switch screens half LB LW setting v 100 0100 OFF 0300 0340 O37F 0320 O3FF 0260 O2FF 0260 O2FF 2 6 12 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH Network range assignment first half LB LW settings A3ACPU MELSECNET composite master station Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End Monitoring time 2001 10 Switch screens Second halt LB LW setin v 0400 4 0400 O4FF 0500 OSFF 0500 OSFF 0500 0500 b Gateway station Q2ASCPU L5 1Mp1 The following shows the network parameter settings of the gateway station Q2ASCPU L5 1Mp1 e Network parameter settings Q2ASCPU L5 1Mp1 0000 2 MNET II comp Local station MN
263. mote I O station Change it to REMFR instruction Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series MELSECNET 10 module Instruction name Q series MELSECNET H module Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Reads data from the buffer memory of special function Reads data from the buffer memory of the intelligent ZNFR instruction cannot be used ZNFR instruction gt module in the target remote I O function module in the target Change it to REMFR station remote I O station instruction Writes data to the buffer Writes data to the buffer ZNTO instruction cannot memory of special function memory of the intelligent be used ZNTO instruction module the target remote I O function module in the target Change it to REMFR station remote I O station instruction SEND instruction Sends data to target station instruction Reads data sent by SEND instruction to device of CPU module READ instruction 2 Reads the device data of other station SREAD instruction WRITE instruction Writes data to the device of other station SWRITE instruction Issues remote RUN STOP clock data read write REQ instruction requests to other stations ZNRD instruction Reads the device data of other station ZNWR instruction Writes data to the device of other sta
264. mparison of dedicated monitor program up ee Transient transmission A link instruction refer to download download ee Section 4 6 2 e Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 32 points per slot I O 32 points per slot I O Number of occupied I O SI assignment special 32 assignment intelli 32 gt points points 2 QnA QnAS series 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK a Performance comparison of AJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21 and QJ71LP21 25 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ71QLP21 QJ71LP21 25 Compat ibility Precautions for replacement A1SJ71QLP21 MELSECNET 10 mode Maximum number 8192 points of link points 8192 points network Ww 8192 points O Maximum number of link Y B 8 2 W lt 2000 bytes points per station Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote Maximum number of networks O networks Maximum number of groups 9 pristationsiconnected 64 stations Control st
265. mum number of link 8 2 lt WIES 1600 bytes Multiplexed remote master station lt gt multiplexed remote O points per station sub master station Y B 8 2x W S 2000 bytes Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Maximum number of 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote networks networks O Number of stations 65 stations Remote master station 1 Remote station connected in one network 64 3 Applicable cable GI optical cable Overall distance 30km Distance between optical cable 2km stations Error control system CRC 6 12 5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS function Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up download etc with 1 1 communication 2 For comparison of dedicated Or peripheral device Monitor program up m Transient transmission A link instruction refer to Intelligent function download etc ne Section 5 6 2 modules applicable Dedicated link instruction Dedicated
266. n accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote network e MELSECNET MELSECNET B Local Station Data Link Module User s Manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual If a coaxial cable is disconnected the network may be unstable resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions
267. n to station test 4 Online 25Mbps reverse loop test for the station Mode setting master station 5 Self loopback test 25Mbps to station test switch 6 Station to station test 6 Internal self loopback test Check network No group slave station 25Mbps and station No in GX Developer 7 Self loopback test 7 Hardware test 25Mbps network diagnostics host 8 Internal self loopback test Using QJ71LP21G and information 9 H W test QJ71BR11 D Network No check Sets the mode E Group No check lt Setting range gt F Station No check 0 Online 1 Self loopback test 2 Internal self loopback test 3 Hardware test Condition Set in GX Developer network setting switch Sets the operation conditions parameters 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK b Remote I O station switch settings comparisons Switch name O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series Q series Compat ibility Precautions for replacement MELSECNET 10 module Sets the mode lt Setting range gt MELSECNET H module Using QJ72LP25 25 Sets the mode lt Setting range gt 0 Online 10Mbps 1 Self loopback test 10Mbps 2 Internal self loopback test 0 Online 7 2 Offline 10Mbps Set offline and loop test in GX i 3 Hardware test 10Mbps Developer network parameters 3 Loop test
268. nctions various diagnostic functions N N communication N N communication e g monitor program e g monitor program For comparison of dedicated Transient transmission up download up download link instruction refer to Dedicated link Dedicated link Section 4 6 2 instruction instruction 32 points per slot I O 32 points per slot I O Number of occupied I O P Mod P e Arts assignment special 32 assignment intelli 32 2 points points 4 11 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 12 Performance comparison of AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11 QJ71BR11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ71QBR11 QJ71BR11 dd ibility replacement A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET 10 mode Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points network Ww 8192 points Maximum number of link B 8 2 W lt 2000 bytes points station Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token bus method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method Manchester code Transmission method Single bus Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks remote Maximum number of networks O networks Maximum number of groups 9 uL IE 32 station
269. nd multiplexed remote sub master station 3 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 3 Performance comparison of AJ71LR21 A1SJ71LR21 and QJ71BR11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat ERN Precautions for replacement AJ71LR21 A1SJ71LR21 QJ71BR11 ibility Maximum number LX LY 18192 points of link points LB 8192 points 16384 points network LW 8192 points 16384 points lt Remote master station gt Remote I O station gt 2 LY LB 8 2 x LW S Remote master station gt 1600 bytes Maximum number of link remote station lt Multiplexed remote points per station LY LB 8 2 x LW S master station lt gt 2 1600 bytes multiplexed remote sub master station gt LY LB 8 2 x LW S 2000 bytes Communication speed 10Mbps Nothing to be noted though the Communication method Token ring method Token bus method A E communication method differs Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method Manchester code The coaxial bus system cannot use the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus A Using the optical loop syste
270. ng Accumulates and stores the number of D9211 SWOOCE count value count loop checks conducted D9212 510084 PEE Stores local stations in Stores the CPU 09213 Local stati 510085 Each station CPU ENSEM Sinon a STOP or PAUSE ee oe RUN status of each D9214 operation status SW0086 RUN status EE status station D9215 SW0087 D9216 Stores whether each 09217 Local station error local station has T Can be substituted by D9218 detection status detected any error in SW0074 to SW0077 D9219 other station D9220 Local station Turns ON when a local SW007C D9221 parameter station or a remote I O SW007D mismatch station has detected Parameter eror 09222 SWOO7E status of each parameter status of Remote I O station an error on the link Y station each station p9223 l O assignment parameters from the SW007F error master station 09224 station SW0078 Stores stations that are Parameter Stores the D9225 remote station SW0079 initial performing communication communication DEAS Locas communication of link SWO007A status of each status of each arameters station station parameters D9227 underway SW007B 09228 SW0074 79229 Local station Stores data link error 8 0075 Cyclic transmission Stores cyclic remote station 4 status of each transmission status D9230 sta
271. nitoring time BW setting BW setting XY setting XY setting Network range Reserved Network range Reserved assignment station assignment station designation common designation parameter assignment parameter Set with the PLC parameter of setting A each remote station Supplemental Supplemental settings settings O Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Routing parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other Valid module during other station access station access b Parameter of multiplexed remote master station Description 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Parameter Compat name QnA QnAS series Q series ibilit Precautions for replacement ibili MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module 2 Network type Network type Starting I O No Starting I O No Network Network Total number of slave stations number of slave stations group No is not used in the Group No A remote I O network Set to 0 Set the mode in GX Developer Mode A network parameters Monitoring time Monitoring time BW setting BW setting Network XY setting XY setting O parameter Reserved Reserved tati tati Network range e Rd Network range O gt designation designation assignment assign
272. nk module Local station Master station Third tier for the third tier Local station MELSECNET II Local station mode Local station 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU THE MELSECNET II AS THE LOCAL 5 400 MOV MOV MOV X201 BMOVP WO BMOVP K4B0 SM402 X207 20 21 22 020 61024 020 6592 DMOV wozo DMOV wozo DMOV MOV SFR BMOV K4Y1000Z0 DMOV MOV SFR BMOV K4B0Z0 DMOV MOV SFR BMOV K4B0Z0 1002 U20 6102420 1014 020 6102420 W100E 20 22 020 646472 W1008 ZO 22 020 659272 W101A ZO 22 020 659272 02042 02043 02044 4096 256 DY210 DY216 D2040 DY211 SD2040 H26 20 71 70 71 20 22 K4 71 20 22 K4 71 20 22 K4 71 Saves the relevant device data in the save area When powered ON initializes B W devices Transfers W to the local module Transfers B to the local module RUN status Refresh request In refresh ready status starts refresh No refresh request Refresh in execution Obtains whether the refresh information table is present or not Saves the refresh information table into W W device transmission First half Start No 70 No of words 21 Transfers W of the host station to the local module First half W device trans
273. nment Assignment method Parameter Drive Path Points Start name Project Name Board Start End Switch screens Reference Head Cancel Setting Setting2 Network range assignment EET REGIA TI Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Start End 1 384 0100 27F 384 0500 067 768 0200 2 25 0280 037 256 0680 0774 512 0500 3 25 0000 00 256 0400 O4FF 512 0000 Disable Disable Disable Reference network range assignment Assignment method 1 Parameter Drive Path Points Start name Project Name 71 Board Start End Switch Screens Reference Head Setting 2 Network range assignment Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End L 1 38 0100 027 384 osoo 067 768 0200 O4FF Disable 2 25 0280 oszF 25 oseoj 0 7 512 0500 OBFF Disable 3 5 0000 oorr 26 0400 512 000 QIFF Disable Pairing LB settings settings m 4 Refresh parameter MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 Assignment method Points Start Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold Start End NN Tense Transfere
274. ns user flag which is Change to a sequence UFOUT instruction corresponding to the host on program that uses the link off relay and link register 4 27 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 3 Q series dedicated link instruction list The table below shows the dedicated link instructions usable in Q series For instruction format of dedicated link instruction and precautions refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Can be used by both the control and normal stations x Cannot be used Execution 5 Target station station Instruction Name Description AnU AnUS H CPU SEND Writes data to the target station network module having the target network number RECV Reads data sent with SEND to the CPU device SEND Data sending 2222 CRUE Network module 7 _ Network module CPU __ Channel 1 Logical channel 1 channel 1 H Channel 2 f Logical channel 2 channel 2 f SEND as 1 Logical channel 3 channel 3 H i Channel 4 NC Logical channel 4 channel 4 d Dat i Channel 5 Logical channel 5 channel 5 ata i if Channel 6 Logical channel 6 channel 6 RECV recei in H Ch
275. nt function modules applicable Dedicated link instruction 1 1 communication Monitor program up download etc Dedicated link instruction For comparison of dedicated link instruction refer to Section 5 6 2 Number of occupied points 5 21 32 points per slot I O assignment special 32 points 32 points per slot VO assignment intelli 32 points 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 Performance comparison of AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71BR11 and QJ71BR11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ71QBR11 ihr QJ71BR11 ibility replacement A1SJ71QBR11 Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points 1 network Ww 8192 points 16384 points O Remote master station remote station 2 Y B 8 2 x W S 1600 bytes Multiplexed remote master station lt gt multiplexed remote sub master station gt Y B 8 2 x W S 2000 bytes Maximum number of link points per station Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token bus method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method Manchester code Transmission method Single bus Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote Maximum number of networks
276. o example in c 3 1Ns3 9 Refer to example 2 Refer to example 3 Setting required A Setting required Default setting is also acceptable 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC MELSECNET II composite mode master station The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET II composite mode master station 1 Network parameter setting MELSECNET II composite mode master station Module Not comp Master LE Necessary setting No setting Already set Setifitisneeded No setting Already set J Valid module Start No P E 5 during other station access 1 z Interlink transmission par ameter Input the start 1 0 No installed in the module 16 point unit Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Check End Cancel 2 Network range assignment A3ACPU MELSECNET II composite mode master station First half C Points Start Monitoring time 201 10ms Stat End 2 Switch screens First half LB LW setting 0000 OFF 0000 OOFF 0100 DIFF 0100 OFF 0200 2 0200 o2FF 3 Network range assignment A3ACPU MELSECNET Il composite mode master station Second half Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End Monitoring time
277. o system 2 stations in 1 scan With multiplex transmission Secured data send Secured data receive Transient setting Maximum No of transients in 1 scan 2 Times Maximum No of transients in one station Times Cancel b assignments c The I O assignment function is used to reserve and set module information to prevent I O numbers from deviating even if a module is mounted later on in an empty slot and to conserve the number of points With MELSECNET H each of the I O assignments are set on each remote station With MELSECNET 11 however as the I O assignments of all remote I O stations were set on the master station CPU Set the assignments of each remote station again at transition to MELSECNET H Also as the I O assignment settings of PLC parameters are not cleared when the programmable controller type is changed e g when ASACPU is changed to QOGHCPU manually clear the I O assignment settings for the remote I O stations Processing time The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A AnS QnA QnAS series and the Q series For details on processing times refer to the manual for the respective module 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 1 List of MELSECNET 10 Alternative Models 1 Replacement of the A AnS series REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK Netw
278. on only by station ZNRD or READ number designation instruction LWTP instruction cannot Writes data to the device of be used Change them to LWTP instruction other station only by station ZNWR WRITE number designation instruction 2 QnA QnASCPU Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QCPU Compat Precautions for Instruction name QnA QnASCPU MELSECNET H module ibility replacement MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET 10 mode SEND instruction Sends data to target station Reads data sent by SEND instruction to device of CPU instruction O module READ instruction SREAD Reads the device data of other station instruction WRITE instruction SWRITE Writes data to the device of other station instruction Issues remote and clock data read write requests REQ instruction to other stations ZNRD instruction Reads the device data of other station ZNWR instruction Writes data to the device of other station DN Change to a sequence 7 Turns user flag which is UFSET instruction program that uses the link corresponding to the host on relay and link register AP Change to a sequence 7 F Turns user flag which is UFRST instruction program that uses the link corresponding to the host off relay and link register Tur
279. onization method Encoding method Manchester code The coaxial bus system cannot use the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus Using the optical loop system is recommended for using the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to No 255 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC MEAM Maximum number of networks PLC networks and to PLC networks and a Alternate them with unused remote I O networks remote I O networks network Nos Maximum number of groups 9 O Up to 31 stations are available as the normal station of coaxial bus 64 stations 32 stations Number of stations connected System Control station 1 normal Control station 1 normal one network Using the optical loop station 63 station 31 system is recommended for connecting 32 normal stations or more Applicable cable er i 5C 2V 9 Using the optical loop 3C 2V 19 2km 3C 2V 300m system or AGBR10 AGBR10 Overall distance A 5C 2V 30km 5C 2V 500m DC repeater unit is recommended Distance between stations i i 5C 2V 500m e Error control system CRC X6 X12 X5 1 and retry by a time over 4 4 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK RAS function Specifications AJ71LR21 A1SJ71LR21 Loop back function due to error detection o
280. ons Refer to Local station only Section 1 1 1 1 a 2 tier system Remote station only Section 1 1 1 1 b Mixture of local station and remote station Section 1 1 1 1 c Optical loop Local station only Section 1 1 1 1 d 3 tier system 2 tier local station 3 tier remote station Section 1 1 1 1 e Mixture of local station and remote station Section 1 1 1 1 f Local station only Section 1 1 1 2 a 2 tier system Remote station only Section 1 1 1 2 b Mixture of local station and remote station Section 1 1 1 2 c Coaxial loop Local station only Section 1 1 1 2 d 3 tier system 2 tier local station 3 tier remote station Section 1 1 1 2 e Mixture of local station and remote station Section 1 1 1 2 f Local station only Section 1 1 1 3 a 2 tier system Remote station only Section 1 1 1 3 b Mixture of local station and remote station Section 1 1 1 3 c Twisted pair Local station only Section 1 1 1 3 d 3 tier system 2 tier local station 3 tier remote station Section 1 1 1 3 e Mixture of local station and remote station Section 1 1 1 3 f 1 Optical cable system a 2 tier system 1 System configuration example using local stations only MELSECNET II Optical loop Optical loop MELSECNET H 1 System configuration precautions Distance between stations If this
281. ontroller CPU error Retains the output status of the remote I O station in the case of the remote master station error Set the function with the PLC parameter of the remote I O module 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK RAS function Automatic return function Description QnA QnAS series Q series MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module Returns the station disconnected from data link to the system when it goes to normal status and restarts data link Precautions for replacement Loopback function Keeps normal operation between operable stations by disconnecting faulty area at error occurrence such as cable break Station detach function Keeps normal operation between operable stations except faulty stations and stations switched off Transient transmission available even if programmable controller CPU is in error Checks the errors for CPU modules of which a stop error occurs via network from the GX Developer Checking the transient transmission abnormal detection time Diagnostic function Checks error completion time abnormal detection network number and abnormal detection station number of transient transmission Checks line conditions of the network and setting conditions of the module Substitute the forward loop reverse loop test for the station to station test Set diagnostic items for station to station test and forward loo
282. oop side the loopback on the loopback loopback reverse loop side D9207 Max value SWO006B Max value D9208 Link scan time Min value SWO006C Link scan time Min value 09209 Current value 0060 Current value i Accumulates and The retries on the Number of retries stores the number of forward loop side are SWOO0C8 the forward loop A aide retries on the stored as a cumulative 09210 Retry Stored as cumulative forward loop side value Accumulates retries the Number of retries stores the number of reverse loop side are SWOO0C9 the reverse loop sida retries on the stored as a cumulative reverse loop side value 3 25 to next page 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O Special register the case of MELSECNET Il master station Description Number Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNETH special register Description Precautions for replacement Loop switching Stored as cumulative Loop switching Accumulates and stores the number of 9211 SWOOCE count value count loop checks conducted D9212 SW0084 TE Stores local stations in Stores the CPU D9213 Local stati SW0085 Each station CPU 52007 a STOP or PAUSE eod RUN status of each D9214 operation status SW0086 RUN status EE
283. ork No A Alternate them with unused network Nos Total number of slave stations Total number of slave stations Set the mode GX Developer Mode A network parameters Monitoring time Monitoring time LB LW setting BW setting LX LY setting XY setting Network range Reserved Network range Reserved assignment station assignment station designation common designation parameter assignment parameter Set with the PLC parameter of setting each remote station Supplemental Supplemental settings settings O Refresh parameters Refresh parameters Routing parameters Routing parameters Valid module during other Valid module during other station access station access 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK b Parameter of remote I O station When mounting the intelligent function module on the remote I O station set the parameter When mounting only modules the operation is available even if the parameter is not set It is operated with default value Parameter name PLC parameters series MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Q series PLC system setting Precautions for replacement New parameter of MELSECNET H The number of empty slots etc is set PLC RAS setting New parameter of MELSECNET H The operation mode and er
284. ork type A AnS series Q series AJ71LP21 71LP21 25 Optical loop A1SJ71LP21 oe AJ71LP21G QJ71LP21G 5 AJ71LR21 A1SJ71LR21 er Coaxial bus A1SJ71BR11 2 Replacement of the QnA QnAS series Network type QnA series Q series oa QJ71LP21 25 A1SJ71QLP21 Optical loop AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21S AJ71QLP21G QJ71LP21G Coaxial loop Aes A1SJ71QLR21 QJ71BR11 Coaxial bus eu ES A1SJ71QBR11 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 2 Performance Specifications Comparisons 4 2 1 Module performance comparisons incompatible 1 A AnS series a Performance comparison of AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 and QJ71LP21 25 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible 4 2 Specifications QJ71LP21 25 AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 MELSECNET 10 mode Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Maximum number LX LY 8192 points of link points 8192 points network LW 8192 points Maximum number of link LY LB 8 2x LW lt 2000 bytes O points per station Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to No 255 255 Total number of PLC 239 Total number of PLC cannot be s
285. ose of MELSECNET H normal stations when replaced with the MELSECNET mode Refer to the Section 2 5 2 1 MELSECNET mode 2 Station inherent parameter For the station inherent parameter settings settings of the same content as that for the control stations has to be set to all normal stations Station inherent parameter 2 MELSECNET H normal station Reference network range assignment Assignment method Parameter Drive Path EA Points Start name Project Name QO6HCPU_a Board Start End Switch LB settings screens Reference Read Cancel Seting1 Seting2 Network range assignment Station No Pairing Fen Stat End Pons Stat End Ports Stat End 1 258 0000 OFF 256 0800 osrr 512 0000 OIFF Disable a oo F Disable 25 0200 25 0400 5 2 0400 Disable 4 0300 oxr 600 3 Refresh parameters The same parameter settings are required on all normal stations Refresh parameters 002 MELSECNET H normal station Assignment method Points Start Start End Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold eS na T TransferSB FF EN EST 00 Transfer SW po po sw 0000 Random LB Sa i La 0000 0800
286. ot applied Remote device station 80000 initialization procedure registration instruction Refresh instruction Master station switch data link SB0042 acknowledgement status at start acceptance Mo standby master switching Refresh instruction complete Added on the Q series and Master station switch data link 5 0043 status at standby master replacement is not applied start complete NUM Switching Forced master switching SB0046 executable status SBOO4E Parameter setting test Parameter information read The functions of A AnS series acceptance status acknowledgement status are different from those of Q series Since the parameter setting test SBOO4F Parameter setting test Parameter information read function is not required for the complete status completion status Q series delete the sequence program for the corresponding function Master station duplication error SB0057 canceling acknowledgement Master station duplication error 5 0058 canceling complete Master switching request SB005A acknowledgement Master switching request 5 005 complete SBOOSC Forced master switching Added on the Q series and request acknowledgement replacement is not applied Forced master switching 80050 request complete Execution status of remote 5 005 device station initialization procedure Completion status of remote 5 005 device station initialization procedure 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK Number A
287. ote I O stations MELSECNET Il Coaxial loop MELSECNET H Coaxial bus Network 1 1 4 2 Network 2 2R3 1 6 System configuration precautions Distance between stations If this value exceed the Q series specification values when re using the MELSECNET II system cables 3C 2V has to be changed to 5 2 1 Overall distance If this value exceeds the Q series specification value when MELSECNETI II system cables re used measures e g adding a repeater unit are required 1 CPU When replacing an integrated type CPU one new slot 32 points is required Duplex loop When the transmission path has to be duplexed changes to an optical loop system etc are required Composite system As a mixture of a PLC to PLC network and a remote I O network is not allowed on the Q series the network has to be divided into two networks having different network Nos For this reason a separate network module for the remote master station is required New installation A separate coaxial cable is required for the remote I O stations 71 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET H is faster than and as the transmission method is different the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter 1 INTRODUCTION d 3 tier system 1 System configuration example using local stations only MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H System configuration pre
288. oup No Set in GX Developer network P 2 Sets the group 2 setting switch parameters Mode setting switch Sets the mode lt Setting range gt 0 Online 2 Offline 5 Station to station test master station 6 Station to station test slave station 7 Self loopback test 8 Internal self loopback test 9 H W test D Network No check E Group No check F Station No check Sets the mode lt Setting range gt 0 Online 1 Self loopback test 2 Internal self loopback test 3 hardware test Set offline loop test and station to station test in GX Developer network parameters Check network No group No and station No in GX Developer network diagnostics host information Condition setting switch 4 18 Sets the operation conditions This switch cannot make parameter setting Set in GX Developer network parameters 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 2 QnA QnAS series Switch name Network No setting switch Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series MELSECNET 10 module Sets the network No Q series MELSECNET H module MELSECNET 10 mode Precautions for replacement Set in GX Developer network parameters Group No setting switch Sets the group No Set in GX Developer network parameters Mode setting switch Sets the mode lt Setting ran
289. p reverse loop test in GX Developer network parameters Blown fuse error and input output verification error check disabled function Sets the error check of the blown fuse error and the input output verification error Set the function with the PLC parameter of the remote module 5 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 4 Switch Settings Comparisons 1 A AnS series a Switch settings comparisons of remote master station Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description Switch name series Q series ibilit Precautions for replacement MELSECNET 10 module MELSECNET H module ps Compat Set in GX Developer network parameters Network No Network No 240 to No 255 5 Sets the network No A setting switch cannot be set Alternate them with unused network Nos Using QJ71LP21 25 and QJ71LP21S 25 Sets the mode Sets the mode lt Setting range gt lt Setting range gt 0 Online 10Mbps 0 Online 1 Self loopback test 10Mbps 2 Offline 2 Internal self loopback test Set offline and loop test in GX 3 Loop test forward loop 10Mbps Developer network parameters 4 Loop test reverse loop 3 Hardware test 10Mbps Substitute the forward loop 5 Station to station test 4 Online 25Mbps reverse loop test for the station Mode setting master station 5 Self loopback test 25Mbps
290. parameter setting QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H control station mode re 0 0 eee Group 1 EL joe 2 B E lt 2 Network range assignment QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H control station Setup common and Station inherent parameters Assignment method Points Start Monitoring time 201 10ms Parameter name Start End 7 Switch screens LB LW settings OOFF 0000 GOFF Disable 0100 0100 jDisable 0200 02 0200 02 S _ Disable L 3 Refresh parameters QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H control station Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold Assignment method Points Start Start End 0000 O1FF 0000 O1FF 0000 O37F 0000 037 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC d MELSECNET H normal station 2 16 The following shows the network parameter settings after replacing with MELSECNET H normal station QO2HCPU The same parameter settings are required on all normal stations 1 Network parameter setting 002 MELSECNET H normal station 7 NETH mode Nomai saton La
291. peripheral device Monitor program up QA Transient transmission A link instruction refer to Intelligent function modules applicable Dedicated link instruction download etc Dedicated link instruction Section 5 6 2 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 3 4 When the X Y numbers are duplicate one side only is taken into consideration For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 3 Performance comparison of AJ72QLR25 A1SJ72QLR25 and QJ72BR15 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat AJ72QLR25 Precautions for replacement QJ72BR15 ibility A1SJ72QLR25 Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points network 8192 points 16384 points Maximum number of link Remote I O station remote master station points per station X B 8 2 x W S 1600 bytes Max number of I O points Suv stance ee per remote I
292. plexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ71QLP21S QJ71LP21S 25 ibility replacement A1SJ71QLP21S Voltage 20 4VDC to 31 2VDC 20 4VDC to 31 2VDC Current 0 2A 0 20A External power Cables of 1 25mm or more supply Applicable 2 0 75 to 2mm 0 3 to 1 25mm A should be replaced with cable size cables of 0 3 to 1 25mm 48 points 2 slots 32 points per slot assignment first half Set the Empty 16 points of Number of occupied I O point I O assignment special 32 empty 16 points A first half to the Empty 0 points second half intelli 32 point with assignment points 5 18 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 19 3 Performance comparison of AJ71QLP21G QJ71LP21G Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ71QLP21G QJ71LP21G ibility replacement Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points network 8192 points 16384 points O Remote master station Remote I O station 2 lt Maxi
293. r broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Prevention of system down by switching the control station Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions QJ71BR11 MELSECNET 10 mode Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Prevention of system down by switching the control station Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Precautions for replacement The loopback function cannot be used on a coaxial bus system To use the loopback function using an optical loop system is recommended Transient transmission Number of occupied I O points N N communication e g monitor program up download Dedicated link instruction 32 points per slot I O assignment special 32 points N N communication e g monitor program up download Dedicated link instruction 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli 32 points For comparison of dedicated link instruction refer to Section 4 6 2 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK d Performance comparison of AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11 and QJ71BR11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications P Compat Precautions for QJ71BR11 AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11 ibility replacement ME
294. r checking local link lines Prevention of system down by switching the control RAS function O station Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions N N communication e g N N communication e g For comparison of dedicated ar monitor program up monitor program up Hp Transient transmission A link instruction refer to download download en Section 4 6 2 Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction 7 32 points per slot I O 32 points per slot I O Number of occupied I O ants assignment special 32 assignment intelli 32 2 points points 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK c Performance comparison of AJ71LR21 A1SJ71LR21 and QJ71BR11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for QJ71BR11 rae AJ71LR21 A1SJ71LR21 ibility replacement MELSECNET 10 mode Maximum number LX LY 8192 points of link points LB 8192 points network LW 8192 points O Maximum number of link LY LB 8 2 x LW lt 2000 bytes O points per station Communication speed 10Mbps Nothing to be noted though Communication method Token ring method Token bus method A the communication method differs Synchronous type Frame synchr
295. r of link remote master station remote master station 2 points per station LX LB 8 2 x LX LB 8 2x LW S O 1600 bytes 1600 bytes Max number of I O points X Y o0d0 point MES per remote I O station v poms m pomis O This is a new function from M 8192 points A MELSECNET H Nuraberofdevice SM 2048 points This is a new function from u vi i a T MELSECNETIH i E This is a new function from station D 12288 points A MELSECNET H This is a new function from SD 2048 points A MELSECNET H Communication speed 10Mbps Communication method Token bus method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method Manchester code Transmission method Single bus Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Network No 240 to No 255 255 Total number of PLC cannot be set to PLC networks and remote I O networks 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and A remote I O networks Maximum number of networks Alternate them with unused network Nos 33 stations Remote master station 1 remote I O 33 stations Remote master Number of stations station 1 remote connected in one network station 32 station 32 Applicable cable 2 RE 5C 2V o Overall distance 22 Vi i 5C 2V 500m O Distance between stations 22 2 i i 5C 2V 500m O Error control system CRC 16 12 5 1 and retry by a
296. r of the faulty remote station during online 8 6 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 2 QnA QnAS series O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatiblee Specifications AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N Precautions for replacement Communication between master station and remote I O station The communication of ON OFF information with remote I O station is performed Communication between master and remote device stations The communication of ON OFF information and numerical data with remote device station is performed Communication between master station and local station The communication of ON OFF information and numerical data with local station is performed Communication between master and intelligent device stations The communication is performed with intelligent device station using cyclic transmission and transient transmission Reserved station function By setting remote station and local station which are to be connected in the future as reserved stations these stations are not treated as data link faulty stations If a connected module is specified no data link is available Error invalid station function Remote station and local station that cannot perform data link due to the power supply off etc will not be treated as data link faulty stations with this function Data link status setting at master station programmable controller CPU
297. respective module 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 4 Precautions for system where AnN AnS AnACPU are mixed Pay attention to the following when replacing the MELSECNET II system where AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU are mixed with the MELSECNET 10 system Refer to Chapter 11 COMPOSITE SYSTEMS in Type MELSECNET 10 Network system PLC to PLC network Reference Manual for details a Control station of the MELSECNET 10 system MELSECNET 10 system after transition requires one AnU AnUS H QnA QnAS QCPU as a control station In addition because AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU cannot be a sub control station in the transition to MELSECNET 10 the MELSECNET 10 system after transition requires two or more AnU AnUS H QnA QnAS QCPU to use the control station shift function of MELSECNET 10 b Device range where data link can be executed on the MELSECNET 10 system Device range where data link can be executed on the MELSECNET 10 system is the device range of AnN AnS AnACPU to be connected AnN AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU AnACPU Maximum 0000 to 07FF 0000 to OFFF Maximum 0000 to 07FF 0000 to O3FF 1 For Depends on the number of I O points that can be controlled by AnN AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU 2 For A3ACPU Depends on the number of I O points that can be controlled by ANACPU c When AnN AnA AnSCPU excluding AnUS H CPU are mixed in transition from MEL
298. result of using the contents noted in this handbook 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 m 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT A 7 REVISIONS ot U OUM 8 CONTENTS 9 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 14 CHAPTER1 INTRODUCTION 1 1to1 29 1 4 Transition from MELSECNET II MELSECNET B to MELSECNET H 1 1 1 1 1 Transition to the Q Serl6s 1 1 1 1 2 Transition procedure to a Q series MELSECNET H system 1 13 1 1 3 Transition to and addition of QCPU by utilizing existing network MELSECNET Il 1 16 1 1 4 Replacement selection Ennn 1 19 1 22 Replacement of the MELSECNET 10 for A AnS QnA QnAS Series with the MELSECNET H for Q 1 26 1 3 Replacing the CC Link for A AnS QnA QnAS Series with the CC Link for Q Series 1 29 CHAPTER 2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC NETWORK 2 1to2 75 2 1 List of MELSECNET 1 MELSECNET B Alternative Models 2 2 1 2 2 Performance Specifications
299. reverse direction 5 Data link disabled St th b Station Station ihat Loopback station 09205 implementing implemented forward SW0099 9 forward loop side the loopback on the loopback loopback forward loop side St th b Station Station that Vosnback sta n ia M D9206 implementing implemented reverse SW009A ea S a S ere reverse loop side the loopback on the loopback loopback reverse loop side D9207 Max value SWO006B Max value D9208 Link scan time Min value SWO006C Link scan time Min value 9209 Current value SWO006D Current value Accumulates and The retries on the Number of retries 2 stores the number of forward loop side are 5 00 8 the forward loop A side retries on the stored as a cumulative Stored as cumulative forward loop side value D9210 Retry value Accumulates and The retries on the Number of retries stores the number of reverse loop side are SWOO0C9 the reverse loop A side retries on the stored as a cumulative reverse loop side value to next page 2 67 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 68 Special register in the case of MELSECNET Il master station Description Number O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNETH special register Description Precautions for replacement Loop switching Stored as cumulative Loop switchi
300. rk range assignment for MELSECNET II a Existing B W network range assignment B W0 100 200 300 3FF L1 L2 Empty b B W network range assignment after addition of the gateway station L3 1Mp1 B WO 100 200 300 3FF L1 L2 L3 MELSECNET 10 data receiving area by inter link data transfer When the data is transferred from MELSECNET 10 to MELSECNET II B W300 to 3FF shall be the transfer area 3 Network range assignment for MELSECNET 10 B W1000 1100 1200 1300 1FFF data receiving area by inter link data transfer When the data is transferred from MELSECNET II to MELSECNET 10 B W1000 to 11FF shall be the transfer area Since all points cannot be transferred from MELSECNET II to MELSECNET 10 narrow down the data to be relayed by setting priorities Set the data to be transferred at the inter link data transfer 6 6 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH 4 Example of inter link data transfer Up to 1k bytes first half transferable B WO ST 200 L2 300 L3 MELSECNET 10 side B W1000 1100 1200 1300 1FFF Empty Up to 2000 bytes transferable 5 Network parameter settings a MELSECNET master station The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET master station A3ACPU Network parameter settings A3ACPU MELSECNET master station Module No 1 Module No 2 Module No 3 Module No 4
301. rol system CRC 16 12 5 1 and retry by a time over RAS function Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions The loopback function cannot be used on a coaxial bus System To use the loopback function using an optical loop system is recommended Transient transmission Monitor program up download etc with peripheral device 1 1 communication Monitor program up download etc Dedicated link instruction For comparison of dedicated link instruction refer to Section 5 6 2 Dedicated link instruction 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 4 Performance comparison of AJ72BR15 and QJ72BR15 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat ek Precautions for replacement AJ72BR15 QJ72BR15 ibility Maximumnumber LX LY 8192 points of link points LB 8192 points 16384 points network LW 8192 points 16384 points Remote I O station gt Remote I O station gt Maximum numbe
302. ror check at an error are set Operation setting New parameter of MELSECNET H The parameters for transmitting between devices are set assignment setting New parameter of MELSECNET H The I O assignment of remote I O station etc is set Network parameter Ethernet New parameter of MELSECNET H The network parameter of Ethernet module mounted on the remote I O station is set CC Link New parameter of MELSECNET H The network parameter of CC Link module mounted on the remote station is set Remote password Remote password setting New parameter of MELSECNET H The remote password of Ethernet module and serial communication module etc mounted on the remote station is set 5 40 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 2 QnA QnAS series a Parameter of remote master station Parameter name Network parameter 5 41 Description QnA QnAS series MELSECNET 10 module Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q series MELSECNET H module Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Network type Network type Starting I O Starting I O No Network Network No Total number of slave stations Total number of slave stations Set the mode GX Developer Mode A network parameters Monitoring time Mo
303. s Control station 1 normal station 31 network Applicable cable O 5C 2V Overall distance 2 5 2 500 Distance between stations 5C 2V 500m Error control system CRC x 6 X12 1 and retry by a time over Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Prevention of system down by switching the control station RAS function O e Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers e Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions N N communication N N communication e g monitor program e g monitor program For comparison of dedicated Transient transmission up download up download link instruction refer to Dedicated link Dedicated link Section 4 6 2 instruction instruction 32 points per slot I O 32 points per slot I O Number of occupied I O Pot assignment special 32 assignment intelli 32 points points 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 2 2 Cable performance comparisons 1 Optical fiber cable Overall distance and distance between stations do not differ depending on the optical fiber cable For overall distance and distance between stations refer to Section 4 2 1 2 Coaxial cable a Overall distance Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications A AnS QnA QnAS series Q series Compat Precautions for MELSECNET 10 module MELSE
304. s detect function Detects faulty area with data of link special relay and link special register Reserved station function Treats the stations which are to be connected in the future as reserved stations By specifying the stations which are not connected as reserved stations communication error does not occur 4 15 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 2 QnA QnAS series 4 16 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description QnA QnAS series MELSECNET 10 module Q series MELSECNET H module Compat T Precautions for replacement ibility Communication Performs communications with all stations using link using B W relay and link register Communication using B W Communication Performs communications between I O master station using and the other station in pairs Communication using X Y Cyclic transmission Stops cyclic transmission temporarily with GX Developer stop restart etc 5 Disabled when mounted to the Transfers link data to multiple networks using parameters 9 Inter link data Q00J Q00 Q01CPU all at once when multiple networks connected to A T transfer function Use QCPUs other than those programmable controller E above Direct access to the Reads writes directly from to link device of the network link devices module on the seq
305. s Parameter name Start End Switch screens LW settings Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Send range for each station Low speed LB Low speed Lw Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Stat End 128 mso 328 meo m 1 18 0200 027 128 384 0000 017F 2 37 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 4 Refresh parameter 6 MELSECNET H network 2 control station 2Mp3 0000 0000 O1FF 0100 027F 0100 027F 2 38 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC h MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 Inter link data transfer of gateway station For data transfer between MELSECNET H networks 1 and 2 cange the setting of MELSECNET II 2 and 3 tier by Transferring the data between networks 1 and 2 by the setting of Interlink transmission parameters between gateway stations 1Ns1 and 2Mp3 MELSECNET H network 1 MELSECNET H network 2 Normal station 1Ns1 Control station 2Mp3 LB LW LB LW o 100 100 1 1 4 l 180 180 poi rie EE E DEC
306. s4 Refer to example 2 O Setting required A Setting required Default setting is also acceptable MELSECNET master station 2 14 The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET master station A3ACPU 1 Network parameter setting MELSECNET master station E News Necessary setting No setting Already set Setifitismeeded No setting Already set Start 1 0 No Valid module E 1 z 2 ther station 5 1 Interlink transmission parameter Input the start No installed in the module in 16 point unit Aa ESES OE EEES Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Check End Cancel 2 Network range assignment MELSECNET master station Setup common parameters Assignment method Points Start Start End Monitoring time 200 10ms Total slave Switch screens LE L W settings X b MELSECNET local station As all stations perform cyclic communication according to the network range assignments of the master station there are no parameter settings for network range assignment on local stations 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC MELSECNET H control station The following shows the network parameter settings after replacing with the MELSECNET H control station QO6HCPU 1 Network
307. saving network by using CC Link or CC Link LT is also recommended for remote I O stations 1 12 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 2 1 1 13 Transition procedure to a Q series MELSECNET H system The following shows transition procedure 1 and transition procedure 2 as the transition procedure to a Q series system Transition procedure 1 Simultaneous replacement with MELSECNET 10 The entire MELSECNET II system is replaced with a MELSECNET 10 system with the wiring left as is and then the A AnS QnA QnAS series system is replaced with the Q series system in stages Note however that the gradual transition cannot be made in a network where both of the A AnS QnA QnAS series system and the Q series system exist This is because the MELSECNET H twisted bus system supports only the Q series system er Part of the A AnS series The A AnS series System is replaced System is replaced with a Q series system with the Q series System before transition and the network is Transition steps system in stages System after transition replaced with MELSECNET 10 A series system Q series system 1 B master station Replace with the Q series system and change to the MELSECNET 10 control station 2 MELSECNET II B local station For the stations to be replaced with a Q series system replace the programmable controllers with the Q series and set the stations to MELSECNET 10 norma
308. series module to the base unit tighten the screws within the specified torque range Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product A MELSECNET H module with function version D or later can be replaced online while power is on on any remote station Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant section in the following Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote network Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions NWARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction After installation and wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock NCAUTION Ground the FG terminal to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in malfunction Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring the
309. settings 4 gt Necessary setting Alteadyset itis needed setting Already set Valid module Start 1 0 No during other station access 1 Interlink transmission parameter Please input the starting 1 0 No of the module in HEX 16 bit form Acknowledge XY assignment Assignment image Check End Cancel Group Settings 2 Station inherent parameter 002 MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 Parameter name Switch LB settings i4 screens Reference network range assignment Assignment method Drive Path C MELSEC Gppw Points Start Project Name 902 _ Board Start End Reference Read Cancel Setting 2 Network range assignment Pairing Stat End Points Start End Points Stat End 1 384 moo 02 384 0500 oczF 768 0200 _O4FF Disable 2 258 0290 037 256 0680 077 512 0500 OBFF Disable 256 0000 256 0400 0000 O1FF Disable Reference network range assignment Assignment method Parameter i Drive Path C MELSEC Gppw Points Start Project Name 002 MNETF 1 Hosd Start End Switch LW settings screens Reference Read Cancel Setng Seting2 Network range assignment SAN Pairing Points Stat End Points Start End Points Stat End 1 384 moo o27F 384
310. settings for when a station is replaced with a MELSECNET H remote master station network 2 1 Network range assignment QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H remote master station Setup common parameters and 1 0 assignments Assignment method Points Start Monitoring time 200 10ms Parameter name Start End Toal save 2 Switch screens xv setting station gt station Gy 2 Network range assignment QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H remote master station Setup common parameters and 1 0 assignments Points Start Start End Monitoring time 200 10ms Parameter name Total slave salons P _ Switch screens BW setting m M station gt station M station station M station gt station M station lt station Seres Assignment method eer UR T IR BITS CR End a NM E 2 3 Refresh parameters QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H remote master station Assignment method Points Start Start End Transient transmission error history status verwrite Hold a Eee pul I ES Dev Pon Stat SB SB w 82 BEES 020 0200 0400 0230 048 Transfer f 2 Transfers v e Points 4 020 192 224 3 20 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O An over
311. sh is performed with the FROM TO Section 7 4 system instructions program addition is required Utilizing a comp sample program allows eliminating program creation If the corresponding station before replacement is the Modification master station for the third tier since the replaced module on software cannot be the MELSECNETI II master station changing the third tier to the MELSECNET H 10 is required Three tier Modifying the network parameter and program for the Section 7 3 system third tier is required As link refresh is performed with the FROM TO instructions program addition is required Utilizing a comp sample program allows eliminating program creation Replacing arbitrary station by the QCPU with the existing Extensibility network parameter held is possible 1 22 1 INTRODUCTION 2 Adding the QCPU to the existing network system This section describes the methods for adding the QCPU in the existing network system a Replacing the network to the MELSECNET 10 simultaneously This method simultaneously replaces the existing network with the MELSECNET 10 and adds the QCPU Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration Outline Added QCPU Item Advantage Reference Cost Optical cable existing cable can be utilized however since station has been added laying change of before and
312. son of AJ71QLR21 A1SJ71QLR21 and QJ71BR11 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ71QLR21 QJ71BR11 ada ibility replacement A1SJ71QLR21 MELSECNET 10 mode Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points network Ww 8192 points Maximum number of link B 8 2 W lt 2000 bytes points station m Communication speed 10Mbps Nothing to be noted though Communication method Token ring method Token bus method A the communication method differs Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Noting to be noted though the coding Non Return Encoding method Manchester code A encoding methods are to Zero Inverted different The coaxial bus system cannot use the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus Using the optical loop system is recommended for using the loopback function and multiplex transmission function Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 4 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote Maximum number of networks networks Maximum number of groups 9 2 Up to 31 stations are available as the normal station of 64 stations 32 stations coaxial bus system Number of stations connected j Control station 1 normal Control station 1 normal
313. sponding to the function and set parameters Prohibited to use E PROM with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction YnA YnB Prohibited to use Prohibited to use YnC Delete the sequence program of the section corresponding to the function and set parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction RLPASET instruction YnD E PROM erasure request Prohibited to use YnE YnF Y n 1 0 1 1 1 2 Y n 1 3 Y n 1 4 Y n 1 5 Y n 1 6 Y n 1 7 Y n 1 8 Y n 1 9 Y n 1 A Y n 1 B Y n 1 C Bank switch specification of Bank switching is not required Refer to Section buffer i 8 6 2 1 1 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Prohibited to use Prohibited to use 8 13 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 2 QnA QnAS series a Input signal 8 14 Input signal Signal name AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for replacement 0 Module error Module error Data link status at host Xn1 Data link status at host station station Delete the sequence program of the section Xn2 Parameter setting status Prohibited to use corresponding to the function and check with SBOO6D Parameter setting status Xn3 Data link status of other station Data station Delete the sequ
314. ssion format HDLC standards frame format Error control system CRC 6 12 5 1 and retry by a time over RAS function Diagnostic function for checking local link lines A Master station Master station Number of occ d a pe Standalone 32 points slot I O 32 points per slot I O assignment intelli assignment special 32 points 32 points 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET 1 AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O i 3 2 2 Cable performance comparisons 1 Optical fiber cable a Overall distance The overall distance 30km does not differ according to the optical fiber cable b Distance between stations 1 Sl optical fiber cable Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNET Il MELSECNET H module Compat Precautions for module Optical loop S ibility replacement Optical loop SI optical fiber cable L type 1km 500m 200m A type 2 H type 500m 300m 100m A Refer to below SI optical fiber cable type AN 2P L1 1km 500m 200m H PCFoptical fiber cable 1km 1km 400m Refer to 2 below Broad band H PCF optical fiber cable 1km 1km QSI optical fiber cable 1km 1km 1 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications either change the type of optical fiber cable or install a gateway station midway along existing cables 2 When the distance between stations does not sa
315. station 1 to 64 Standby master station 1 to 64 For remote net mode Master station 1 to 64 The last station No of remote I O station is set Sets the station No of the module Setting range Master station 0 Local station 1 to 64 Standby master station 1 to 64 Sets the last station No at remote net mode with GX Developer Mode setting switch Sets the operation status of the module Transmission speed setting switch Sets the transmission speed of the module Sets the transmission speed and operating status of the module The mode setting and the transmission rate setting are performed with one Switch The remote net mode and remote net mode are specified in GX Developer parameter settings Condition setting switch Sets the operation conditions Settings Station type Input data status of data link faulty station Number of occupied stations The operating conditions are set in the parameter settings of GX Developer 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 8 5 Parameter Comparisons 1 A AnS series Parameter name Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatiblee Specifications AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Network parameter Set this parameter with the sequence program TO instruction or with dedicated instruction RLPA instruction Set this paramet
316. sting MELSECNET II network system The gateway station passes and shares the link data between MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 by inter link data transfer parameter or sequence program 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH 2 Replacing CPU in existing MELSECNET II with QCPU in stages Example A gateway station is Replacement is performed introduced to replace in stages to shift the the system with the system to the Q series System before transition Q series system in stages Transition steps system System after transition Gateway set Gateway station Qn MNET 1 0 1 For the stations replaced with the Q series Master 10 the system is built with MELSECNET 10 station Normal station 2 The MELSECNET 10 system is connected to the MELSECNET II system with the Local MELSECNET station 1 MELSECNET 10 gateway station station station an Ne 3 The stations are replaced with the Q series Local in stages to shift the system to the Q series station Normal syste m station 2 The system is shifted to the MELSECNET H 10 network system by replacing A AnS QnA QnASCPUs the existing MELSECNET II network system with QCPUs in stages until all CPUs are replaced by QCPUs When the existing network is the remote I O network or the network comprising local stations and remote I O stations the remote I O stations must be replaced a
317. sting Section 6 4 MELSECNET II and that of the MELSECNET 10 after replacement change in each replacement modifying network parameter data interlink transmission parameter and program in each case is required Since a module changes to the QCPU in each Extensibility replacement even in the last stage changing module again is unnecessarily 1 21 1 INTRODUCTION c Replacing a station using the MELSECNET local station data link module This method replaces arbitrary station with the QCPU in the existing MELSECNET II Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration Q5 Replaced QCPU Mount the local station data link module to the 156 Refer to Section 1 1 3 1 Item Advantage Outline Reference Cabl Replacement without changing the existing network is able lai possible Laying change of optical loop coaxial loop and Section 7 1 1 ayin oe twisted pair cable are unnecessary Connect the extension base unit QA1S6DB to the Cost replacement station and mount local station data link Network module on it Section 7 2 module n the last stage where all stations become the QCPUs removing the local station data link modules and replacing the MELSECNET H modules are required Since the existing network is held a link without parameter and program modification is possible Two tier As link refre
318. system Simultaneous replacement to the MELSECNET 10 Relay using gateway set Local station data link This section describes check points for selection Definition of symbols O A in the Advantage field shown on the pages starting from the following page is as follows 9 Requires no system change has no restrictions on replacement or has great advantage since system change is minor even if required Has some advantages although some restrictions on replacement exists and system change is required System change is required depending on restrictions on replacement and items must be reviewed are many Selection points 1 Consider the following points and select replacement regarding replacement to addition of the QCPU a Whether the network cable can be utilized and laying change Cost phase Consider from the views whether the existing cable can be utilized without change partial change is sufficient or new laying is required b Necessity of a new module Cost phase Consider from the views from the number of the modules and the type of the module have to be prepared c Affection to the program by changing network parameters Man hour taken for design maintenance Consider from the views whether the existing network parameter setting can be utilized without change and how much network parameter change affects to the sequence program d Ease of phased replacement Extensibility When replacing th
319. t by station inherent parameter 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET H network 1 normal stations 2Ns1 2Ns2 QO2HCPU 1 Network parameter setting QQ2HCPU MELSECNET H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1 2Ns2 Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Network type mode Normal station None None None Starting 170 No 0000 Network 2 Total stations Group No 0 Station No Mode On line X tation inherent parameter Refresh parameters tting X 4 gt Necessary settina Alreadyset Setif itis needed osetting Alreadyset Valid module hos Stat 1 0 No during other station access 1 Interlink transmission parameters Please input the starting 1 0 No of the module HEX 16 bit form Acknowledge XY assignment Routing paramete Assignment image Group Settings Check End 2 Station inherent parameter 002 MELSECNET H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1 2Ns2 Reference network range assignment Assignment method P arameter Drive Path C MELSEC Gppw Points Start name Project Name 902 _ 2 v Board Start End Switch LE settings screens Reference Read Cancel Seting 5 2 Network range assignment 50 Pairing Stat Points Stat End Pons Set End L 1
320. t network parameters 4 31 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 1 List of MELSECNET 10 Alternative Models 1 Replacement of the A AnS series Network type Station type series Q series AJ71LP21 Remote master station A1SJ71LP21 AJ71LP21G QJ71LP21G Optical loop AJ72LP25 AJ72QLP25 QJ72LP25 25 Remote station A1SJT2QLP25 AJ72LP25G QJ72LP25G AJ71LR21 Remote master station 415711821 QJ71BR11 Coaxial loop AJ72LR25 Remote station AJ72QLR25 QJ72BR15 A1SJ72QLR25 AJ71BR11 Remote master station A1SJ71BR11 QJ71BR11 Coaxial bus AJ72BR15 Remote station AJ72QBR15 QJ72BR15 A1SJ72QBR15 2 Replacement of the QnA QnAS series Network type Station type series Q series AJ71QLP21 71LP21 25 A1SJ71QLP21 QJ R t ter stati AJ71QLP21 emote master station Q S QJ71LP21S 25 STER A1SJ71QLP21S P AJ71QLP21G QU71LP21G AJ72QLP25 Remote station A1SJ72QLP25 GUAE Pese AJ72QLP25G QJ72LP25G Remote master station QJ71BR11 Coaxial loop A1SJ71QLR21 Remote station AJ72QLR25 QJ72BR15 AJ71QBR11 R t ter stati 71BR11 emote master station A1SJ710BR11 QJ Remote station QJ72BR15 A1SJ72QBR15 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK Re marks e
321. ta Link refresh B W 0 100 180 200 280 37F 3FF 2Mp3 2Ns1 Network1 1Mp3 1Ns2 CPU Link refresh 1 rel ca aimi alias T 1 MELSECNET H LB LW 0 100 280 37F Network 1 i i Control station 1Mp3 1Mp3 1881 1Ns2 Normal station 1Ns2 Common parameters i PSS SS SSS SSS SSS SS SSS Network1 2 Gateway station Cyclic 1Ns1 2Mp3 communication CPU 22 1 1 LB LW 100 280 MELSECNET H i Network 1 1Mp3 ANs1 1Ns2 Normal station i 1Ns1 i Boxer 1Mp3 Link refresh Inter link transfer 2Mp3 180 i 2Ns1 Link refresh Gateway station 2Ns2 4 1Ns2 1 1 1 1 1 1 37F a aa 1 80 700 180 20027 1 i 1 1 Network 2 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 Control station 2 3 i Common parameters Normal station 2Ns2 ae A Cyclic communication MELSECNET H LB LW 180 20027F Network 2 E Normal station 2Ns1 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 1 i i Ses E L
322. tation remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 52 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 4 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 32 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 20 5 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK RAS function Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ71QLR21 A1SJ71QLR21 Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions QJ71BR11 Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Precautions for replacement The loopback function cannot be used on a coaxial bus system To use the loopback function using an optical loop system is recommended Transient transmission Monitor program up download etc with peripheral device Intellige
323. ter Refresh parameter A Inter link data transfer 1Mp3 Refer to example 2 Refer to example 3 Refer to example 4 1Ns2 o A Refer to example in f 2 Refer to example in f 3 1Ns1 Refer to example 3 2Mp3 Refer to example 5 Refer to example 2 Refer to example 9 4 2351 O A Refer to example in h 2 Refer to example in h 3 2Ns2 o A Refer to example in h 2 Refer to example in h 3 O Setting required A Setting required Default setting is also acceptable Setting not required 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC a MELSECNET II 2 tier master station M The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET II 2 tier master station M A3UCPU 1 Network parameter setting MELSECNET II 2 tier master station M Module Module No 2 Module No 3 Module No 4 LK nd Total stations Network range assignment Refresh parameters Necessary setting No setting Already set Setifitismeeded No setting Alreadyset Valid module Ho z 5 2222 during other station access 1 z Interlink transmission parameters Input the start 1 0 No installed in the module 16 point unit Acknowledge assignment Routing parameters Check End Cance
324. the remote net to DFH 206 to 223 Prohibited to use M A Ver 2 mode Replacement is not applied to 15FH 224 to 351 Remote input RX Remote input RX 0 160H to 1DFH 352 to 479 Remote output RY Remote output RY 1E0H to 2DFH 480 to 735 Remote register RWw Remote register RWw 2 to 3DFH 736 to 991 Remote register RWr Remote register RWr Slave station offset size Added withthe remote net to 5DFH 992 to 1503 Prohibited to use A Ver 2 mode information Replacement is applied to 5FFH 1504 to 1535 Link special relay SB Link special relay SB 600 to 7FFH 1536 to 2047 Link special register SW Link special register SW 800 to 9FFH 2048 to 2559 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use 00 FFFH 2560 4095 Random access buffer Random access buffer 0 to FFFH 0 to 4095 m 7 Delete the program for bank 1 1000 10 1FFFH 4096 to 8191 Communication buffer Communication buffer A switching 0 to FFFH 0 to 4095 Delete the program for bank 2 Aut t dating buffer Automati dating buff 2000H to 2FFFH 8192 to 12287 WOmalle updating buler Automatic updating bufer A switching 3000H to 3FFFH 12288 to 16383 Pronipitod touse Area for Ver 2 The function was added to Q 4000 to 53FFH 16384 to 21503 series modules Prohibited t 5 5400H to 7FFFH 21504 to 32767 A Ans series Q series Bank 0 Bank 1
325. tightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS O
326. tings are required on all normal stations Refresh parameters 002 MELSECNET H normal station Assignment method Points Start Start End SS Dev name Points Stat End TranserSB 512 00 Transfer SW Random cyclic LB J ue Transient transmission error history status Overwrite Hold 2 26 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 5 3 Example of changing parameters on 3 tier system When only the first half of link parameter is set The following shows how to change a system on which first half of LB LW link parameters is set when replacing the MELSECNET 1 3 tier system with MELSECNET H Network range assignment of the present MELSECNET 11 3 tier system can be used in replacement with MELSECNET H The MELSECNET 1 2 tier is replaced with the network 1 of MELSECNET H and 3 tier is replaced with the network 2 The MELSECNET Il master station is replaced with the MELSECNET H control station and MELSECNET local stations are replaced with MELSECNET H normal stations MELSECNET 1 MELSECNET H Optical loop Optical loop A3UCPU A2UCPU QO6HCPU QO2HCPU MELSECNET H Network1 QO6HCPU MELSECNET Il 2 tier A3UCPU 2 1 81 2 3 7 Gateway station A2UCPU A2UCPU Q02HCPU Q02HCPU B W 0 100 280 380 3FF Link parameter of 2 tier Link parameter o
327. tion 5 48 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 3 Q series dedicated link instruction list The table below shows the dedicated link instructions usable in Q series For instruction format of dedicated link instruction and precautions refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote network Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network a For remote station Can be used x Cannot be used Execution Target station Instruction station Description Remote I O module Reads data from the remote I O station intelligent function module buffer memory Remote I O Intelligent CPU Master module module function module Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Read remote station intelligent function module buffer memory REMFR 221 Writes data to object remote I O station intelligent function module buffer memory Not processed at the execution from multiplexed remote sub master station Remote I O Intelligent Master module module function module Write remote CPU 5 49 station intelligent function module buffer memory READ Read other station word device Reads remote I O station device data for object network number in 16 bit units C
328. tion and configuring a PLC to PLC network 1 20 1 INTRODUCTION b Relaying using gateway set This method installs a relay station using gateway set between the replaced QCPU and the existing MELSECNET II for sharing link data Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration 2 gt 1st stage Install the relay Replaced station station at ex A5 from 5 station station position 2nd stage Install the relay Replaced station station at ex A5 from A5 station station position Item Advantage Outline Reference Installing a relay station gateway set at the position 1st where the replaced QCPU is mounted allows OA Cable stage eliminating cable laying change Lay only between the lavin relay station and the replaced QCPU station Section 6 1 ms 2nd Since the station number of the existing n Cost MELSECNET II and that of the MELSECNET 10 after stage replacement changes cable laying change is required 1st Add gateway set as the relay station Network stage 9 y y Section 6 1 module 2nd Change the replaced station s module to QCPU Section 6 2 stage compatible module in each replacement All data relay is disabled due to restrictions on the number of send data per station Therefore reduce relay data Program change according to the relay data is also required Modification on software A Since the station number of the exi
329. tion is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 22 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK b Performance comparison of remote I O stations 1 Comparison between AJ72QLP25 A1SJ72QLP25 QJ72LP25 25 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for AJ72QLP25 Ham QJ72LP25 25 ibility replacement A1SJ72QLP25 Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points network W 8192 points 16384 points Maximum number of link Remote I O station remote master station o points per station X B 8 2 x W S 1600 bytes Max number of I O points per z remote I O station X Y lt 2048 points X Y lt 4096 points O This is a new function from M 8192 points A MELSECNET H Number 2048 points This is a new function from vi i d P MELSECNETIH points remote station D 12288 points This is a new function from P MELSECNETIH This is new function from SD 2048 points A MELSECNET H Communication speed 10Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format 239 Total
330. tions SW0076 station of each station D9231 SW0077 D9232 SW0091 D9233 SWO0092 Forward loop status Stores the forward error on the loop 59234 SWO0093 of each station loop status of each line of the forward loop Local Station and Stores the station that station is stored D9235 detected the error on 5 0094 remote station 09236 the forward loop line SW0095 79237 loop error and reverse loop line Swo096 Reverse loop Stores the reverse The error on the loop 4 status of each loop status of each line of the reverse loop D9238 SW0097 station station is stored D9239 SW0098 Number or Mais Stores cumulative total SW00B8 to Various error Various error ine oar court id D9240 detection each error cause is of receive errors 5 00 7 counters counters times stored 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 4 Local station special register Special registers enabled when host station is a local station Special register the case of MELSECNET Il master station Description Number Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNETH special register Description Precautions for replacement Station number Stores the station Stores the station 09243 inf tion for host SW0042 Station No
331. tions for replacement of QnA QnAS series a Parallel master system The parallel master system cannot be configured in the MELSECNET H Configure two networks System configuration precautions CRD GRA 1 Divide into two networks of which the network No 182 185 2 differs C2R5 2 Set the station that is not used after dividing the Parallel remote master station Remote master station station Parallel remote sub master station Remote Staten Network No 3 Use the inter link data Remote station Station No transfer function for data MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H BENE Network No communication between E Station No the remote master stations b Multiplex master system 1 MELSECNET H can establish the system only when mounting on the following CPU Process CPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU For the MELSECNET H the multiplexed remote master station and the multiplexed remote sub master station cannot be mounted on the same CPU Mount the multiplexed remote master station and the multiplexed remote sub master station on separate CPUs 45 5 53 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING MELSECNET II B WITH CONNECTING MELSECNET 10 TO EXISTING WITH A GATEWAY STATION When adding QCPU to the exisiting MELSECNET II network system or replacing some progr
332. tisfy the MELSECNET H specifications use at a communication speed of 10 Mbps change the type of optical fiber cable or install a gateway station midway along existing cables 2 optical fiber cable O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNET module MELSECNET H module Compat 2 Precautions for replacement Optical loop Optical loop ibility GI optical fiber cable 2km 2km Oo 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 2 Coaxial cable a Overall distance Compatible A Partial change required Incompatible MELSECNET 1 module MELSECNET H module Compat Type DER Precautions for replacement Coaxial loop Coaxial bus ibility 3C 2V 10km 300m A 5C 2V 10km 500m x Refer to below 3 When the overall distance does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications either use an AGBR10 AGBR10 DC type repeater unit in the network or configure a separate network b Distance between stations O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible MELSECNET 1 module MELSECNET H module Compat 7 mies Precautions for replacement Coaxial loop Coaxial bus ibility 3C 2V 500m 300m A 5C 2V 500m 500m Refer to below 4 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET H specifications either use an AGBR10 A6BR10 DC type repeater unit in the network The following shows
333. to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in each intelligent function module Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the CPU module to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system To set the auto refresh parameter select the device Y for the remote output RY refresh device If a device other than Y is selected the CPU module holds the device status even after its status is changed to STOP For how to stop data link refer to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual If a CC Link dedicated cable is disconnected the network may be unstable resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction After changing the parameter of the CPU module or the remote I O module reset the CPU module Failure to do so may cause malfunction since the previous parameter setting remains in the module Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep
334. to the Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET 10 Coaxial Bus System type AGBR10 A6BR10 DC User s Manual 66499 1 distance between stations of 500m 5C 2V and 300m 3C 2V be extended 500m 5C 2V 300m 3C 2V Max QJ71BR11 R Terminal resistor 500m 5C 2V Max 300m 3C 2V 2 Up to four repeater units can be used in a single network 2 The overall distance can be extended to a maximum distance of 2 5 km lt gt 2 5 2 It is necessary to add terminal resistor AGRCON R75 sold separately 5 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 3 Functional Comparisons 1 A AnS series 5 31 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description A AnS series MELSECNET 10 module Q series MELSECNET H module Precautions for replacement Cyclic transfer function Transient transmission function Communicating with module Performs communications with the module of the remote I O station using X Y LX LY Communicating with special function module Performs communications with the special function module of the remote station using X Y LX LY and B W LB LW Data link stop restart function N N communication function
335. trollers must be installed in control panels Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock For wiring methods refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Use CC Link dedicated cables for the CC Link system If not the performance of the CC Link system is not guaranteed For the maximum station to station distance and the overall cable distance follow the specifications in the following If not normal data transmission will not be guaranteed e CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual Startup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so ma
336. ttings by Dividing the data into the first half and second half and refreshing them by the setting of Refresh parameters Also for MELSECNET H control station 2Mp3 of gateway station change the settings of MELSECNET II 3 tier first half second half settings by Assigning LB LW first last size to each station by the setting of Network range assignment Common parameters 2 Dividing the data into the first half and second half and refreshing them by the setting of Refresh 1 parameters MELSECNET H network 1 MELSECNET H network 2 Normal station 1Ns1 CPU Control station 2Mp3 Common parameters LB LW 1FFF Link refresh 1 Set not to duplicate B W on the CPU 2 Perform the LB LW assignment for network 2 control station 2Mp3 including the same LB LW area as that of 1Mp3 to relay network 1 control station 1Mp3 2 56 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 QO6HCPU 1 Network parameter setting QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 network 2 control station 2Mp3 2 Neg YNET mose senna 0020 7 nmi rni 2 57 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 3 Refresh par
337. tus of not in progress EL initial ON Communication 580078 each station ON Parameter communications eer in progress communication status progress OFF All stations normal Local station Cyclic transmission Station where OFF Normal 9237 remote I O station 5 0074 status of each cyclic ON Abnormal M error station transmission is not executing exist OFF All stations 80091 Forward loop status Lua Local station ON Faulty station M9238 remote station OFF Normal present forward reverse ON Abnormal OFF All stations loop error p SB0095 Reverse loop normal status ON Faulty station present 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 2 Master station special register Special register enabled when host station is the master station Special register in the case of MELSECNET Il master station Description Number Compatible Partial change required Incompatible MELSECNETIH special register Description Precautions for replacement Compat ibility 0 Normal completion 2 LRDP instruction setting fault Delete when used in a LRDP processing 3 Error at relevant sequence program D9200 results station None 7 7 Refer to Section 2 6 2 4 Relevant station Transient instructions LRDP execution disabled 0 Normal completion 2
338. twork monitoring and various diagnostic functions Diagnostic function for checking local link lines Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions The loopback function cannot be used on a coaxial bus system To use the loopback function using an optical loop system is recommended Transient transmission Monitor program up download etc with peripheral device Intelligent function modules applicable Dedicated link instruction 1 1 communication Monitor program up download etc Dedicated link instruction For comparison of dedicated link instruction refer to Section 5 6 2 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 4 Performance comparison of AJ72QBR15 A1SJ72QBR15 and QJ72BR15 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat AJ72QBR15 Precautions for replacement QJ72BR15 ibility A1SJ72QBR15 Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points 1 network 8192 points 16384 points Maximum number of link Remote I O station remote master station points per station X B 8 2 x W S 1600 bytes E be dia X Y 2048 points 3 X Y 4096 points per remote I O station Bi This is new
339. twork1 QO6HCPU 3 5 p Gateway station 2 43 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 44 Concept of MELSECNET II 3 tier system replacement Step 1 Control station 1Mp3 setting Set the link parameter setting on MELSECNET II 2 tier master station as MELSECNET H network 1 control station 1Mp3 Network range assignment Common parameters of control station 1Mp3 set the LB LW first half size second half size as a contiguous area on each station It is divided into the first half LB LW and the second half LB LW and transferred depending on the settings 1 and 2 of Station inherent parameter Step 2 Common parameter and refresh parameter settings of gateway station 1Ns1 2Mp3 Common parameter setting and Refresh parameter setting of the MELSECNET II 3 tier master station are set as MELSECNET H network 2 control station 2Mp3 and network 1 normal station 1Ns1 Network range assignment Common parameters of control station 2Mp3 set the LB LW first half size second half size as a contiguous area on each station The range assignment should be performed including the same LB LW size as that of 1Mp3 to relay 1Mp3 Set Refresh parameter to transfer B W by dividing it into the first half B W and the second half B W on each station of network 2 control station 2Mp3 and network 1 normal station 1Ns1 Make sure that B W of networks 1 and 2 will not duplicate on t
340. tworks and A networks Alternate them with unused remote networks remote networks network Nos 65 stations Remote master 65 stations Remote master station 1 remote I O station 1 remote I O station 64 station 64 4 SI optical cable H PCF optical cable Number of stations connected in one network Applicable cable Broad band optical cable O QSI optical cable Overall distance 30km 1 Remote master station remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station 3 When the X Y numbers are duplicate one side only is taken into consideration 4 For the multiplexed remote I O network one station in 64 stations of the remote I O station is used for the multiplexed remote sub master station 5 9 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compat Precautions for replacement AJ72LP25 QJ72LP25 25 ibility lt 10Mbps gt SI optical cable 500m H PCF optical cable 1km Broad band H PCF optical SI optical cable 500m d DIS cable 1km H PCF optical cable 1km optical cable 1km Distance between stations Broad band
341. uction Reads the CPU device data from the target station having the target network number CPU Network module Network module CPU Other station H ZNRD word device 1 read H i ji 2594 it it i E T i Ex ple H 1 A compatible instruction Writes data to the CPU device of the target station having the target network number CPU Network module Network module CPU Other station EE ITE IA 171 Word device ZNWR _ word device 4 Channel2 I n m H write Fixed LLL Pu ig T E T 11 ji i d ji jeu RE le E TA 1 Remote RUN performed for other stations CPU modules C PU 1 Network module Networkmodulee CPU ___ U Chanem i T FOhanel2 T Remote tt Channel 3 Pod T RRUN m RUN H rrun Channel 4 RUN Channel 5 d Channel7 i Channel T potere eae EE NE To next page 4 29 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK Can be used by both the control and normal stations x
342. uence program Increase of sending Allows multiple modules of which the network No Disabled when mounted to the points by mounting modulos Of the same to be mounted to one programmable controller Q00J Q00 Q01CPU ulti u P and increases sending points per one station up to 8000 Use QCPUs other than those the same network bytes above No Default of network Eliminates the refresh parameters setting by using refresh parameter default values of refresh parameters Communicates only when communication requests Transient A issued between each stations Communication using O transmission function dedicated link instruction and GX Developer etc 5 Routing incon Performs transient transmission to other stations of which 8 uting functi 2 network No are different o Performs transient transmission to all stations in the Group function p group with an instruction Dedicated link Performs communications with other station at desired S instruction timing using dedicated link instruction z Specification of Processes the requests that cannot specify network No default network of access path o E Clock setup for stations on network Performs clock setup to CPU modules connected to the with peripheral network with GX Developer device Control station shift Enables to continue data link by switching normal station function to sub control station even if
343. urrence such as cable break Prevention of station failure by using external power Prevents loopback due to shutdown of programmable controller supply Station detach Keeps normal operation between operable stations function except faulty stations and stations switched off Transient transmission available even if programmable controller CPU is in error Checks the errors for CPU modules of which a stop error occurs via network from the GX Developer etc Checking the transient transmission abnormal detection time Checks error completion time abnormal detection network number and abnormal detection station number of transient transmission Diagnostic function Checks line conditions of the network and setting conditions of the module Set diagnostic items for station to station test and forward loop reverse loop test in GX Developer network parameters 4 17 4 REPLACEMENT THE MELSECNET 10 PLC TO PLC NETWORK 4 4 Switch Settings Comparisons 1 A AnS series Switch name Network No setting switch Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Description A AnS series MELSECNET 10 module Sets the network No Q series MELSECNET H module MELSECNET 10 mode Precautions for replacement Set in GX Developer network parameters Network No 240 to 255 cannot be set Alternate them with unused network Nos Gr
344. utpufAY moter PO MELSECNET Ethernet MELSECNET MIN CC Link Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Setting item details Project Q02 H Host station CC Link station information Module 1 2 Station type cyclic setting count points station select Send Receive Automatic 1 1 Remotel O station v singe Exclusive station 1 32points 7 2 2 Remote device station v singe Exclusive station 2 v B4points 3 4 Intelligent device station _ singe Exclusive station 4 v 128 points No setting v 64 54 128 5 9 Inteligent device station v singe v Exclusive station 4 v 128 points Nosetting 64 amp 18 8 27 9 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 9 1 External Dimensions For external dimensions of modules shown in this handbook refer to the User s Manual for each module For external dimensions of base units shown in this handbook refer to the following Relevant model Handbook Manual number Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series 1 L 08043ENG O x O Handbook Fundamentals Transition from MELSEC AnS QnAS Large Type Series to Q Series Handbook Fundamentals L 08219ENG x APPENDICES Appendix 1 Spare parts storage 1 2 3 4 5
345. viding 1Ns2 1Ns3 1Ns4 into two or three networks of 32 modules or less having a different network No are required Duplex loop When the transmission path has to be duplexed changes to an optical loop system etc are required 2 Remote I O network Pay attention to the following common precautions when replacing remote networks Common precautions 1 Replace all master stations and remote I O stations with MELSECNET H modules for the Q series In a remote I O network MELSECNET H modules for Q series MELSECNET 10 modules for A AnS QnA QnAS series cannot be configured together O Connection allowed x Connection not allowed Remote I O station MELSECNET 10 modules for A MELSECNET H modules for Q MELSECNET 10 modules for A master QnA station MELSECNET H modules for Q x 2 When replacing a multiplex master system select Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU or Q25PRHCPU as the CPU module 3 When replacing a parallel master system build a separate network having a different network No Remote a Optical loop system MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H System configuration precautions Optical loop Optical loop There are no extra items in addition to the Giri above common precautions 1 27 1 INTRODUCTION b Coaxial bus system MELSECNET 10 Coaxial bus 1 Network 1 Coaxial loop system MELSECNET 10
346. wing shows the network parameter settings for when a station is replaced with a MELSECNET H control station network 1 1 Network parameter setting QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H control station remote master station Mode2 MNET H mode Control station _ MNET H Remote master 52 0000 0020 lt 2 Network range assignment QQ6HCPU MELSECNET H control station Setup common and Station inherent parameters Assignment method Ponts Stat Moniaingtime 200 x10ms Paremetername Start End E Switch screens xav settings 1 0680 0200 0600 067F 0280 0700 07 0700 07 0200 3 Network range assignment MELSECNET H control station Setup common and Station inherent parameters Assignment method C Points Statt Monitoring time 200 x10ms G Start End Toa seve Switch screens LB LW settings Disable Disable 3 18 3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O 4 Refresh parameters QO6HCPU MELSECNET H control station 0000 O1FF 0000 O1FF 0000 02 0000 02 0600 067 070 077 068 0700 OF 7F 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O d f MELSECNET H remote master station network 2 The following shows the network parameter
347. witch the station number mode setting self diagnostics test Switch Seta communication speed Communication ar E in the network parameter Sets the communication speed Sets the communication speed speed setting switch dialog box of GX Developer 2 11 2 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B PLC TO PLC 2 5 Parameter Comparisons 2 5 4 Parameter comparisons 1 The network parameters of MELSECNET Il are deleted when the programmable controller type is changed with the GX Developer After changing the programmable controller type set the MELSECNET H network parameters again Replacing MELSECNET Il with MELSECNET H The following shows a comparison between MELSECNET 1 network parameter settings and MELSECNET H network parameter settings MELSECNET master station settings are compared with the MELSECNET H control station settings and the MELSECNET 1 local station setting are compared with the MELSECNET H normal station settings MELSECNET 11 Optical loop Optical loop MELSECNET H c O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible t MELSECNET II MELSECNET H Precautions for replacement ibility Network type Network type O Starting Starting 1 No No setting Network No A Mandatory for the MELSECNET H The total ber of stati is 64 at Total nu
348. works Alternate them with unused remote networks remote networks network Nos 65 stations Remote master 65 stations Remote master Number of stations 3 station 1 remote station 1 remote connected in one network 3 station 64 station 64 Applicable cable GI optical cable Overall distance 30km Distance between stations optical cable 2km Error control system CRC X 6 X12 X5 1 and retry by a time over Loop back function due to error detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link lines RAS function TENA Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions Monitor program up 1 1 communication For comparison of dedicated Se download etc with Monitor program up Transient transmission A link instruction refer to Section peripheral device download etc 562 Dedicated link instruction Dedicated link instruction pd 32 points per slot 32 points per slot Number of occupied I O 5 ape I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelli 32 points points 1 Remote master station gt remote sub master station remote I O station 8192 points Remote sub master station remote I O station remote master station 8192 points 2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station a
349. xed remote sub master station 5 16 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET 10 REMOTE I O NETWORK 5 17 2 Performance comparison of AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21S QJ71LP21S 25 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications AJ71QLP21S QJ71LP21S 25 A1SJ71QLP21S Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Maximum number X Y 8192 points of link points 8192 points 16384 points network W 8192 points 16384 points Remote master station Remote I O station zZ Maximum number of link eB eee VIS 1600 bytes 5 Multiplexed remote master station lt gt multiplexed remote points per station sub master station gt Y B 8 2 x W S 2000 bytes Communication speed 10Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps O Communication method Token ring method Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Encoding method NRZI coding Non Return to Zero Inverted Transmission method Duplex loop Transmission format HDLC standards frame format Maximum number of 239 Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote networks networks O Number of stations 65 stations Remote master station 1 remote station connected one network 64 3 O SI optical cable H PCF optical cable i Me Broad band H PCF optical cable O QSI optical cable Overall distance 30km lt 10Mbps gt SI optical cable
350. xial cable has to be j 5C 2V installed 30km 125kbps 1200m EN 250kbps 600m Either use an AGBR10 500kbps 400m _ 2 X MOBI IDE type repeater 1Mbps 200m 5C 2V 500m unit or configure a separate network When 1200m is required use Refer to Section GI optical cables for all optical 125kbps 1200m 3 2 2 cables use QJ71LP21G Distance between 250kbps 600m as the module stations 500kbps 400m Either use AGBR10 1Mbps 200m 3C 2V 300m A6BR10 DC type repeater 7 5C 2V 500m A unit or configure a separate network Maximum number of New MELSECNET H 239 A networks parameter mandatory to next page 3 6 3 REPLACEMENT MELSECNET AND MELSECNET B REMOTE I O O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications MELSECNET B module MELSECNETI H module Compat E Precautions for replacement Optical loop Coaxial bus ibility Twisted pai wisted pair QJ71LP21 25 QJ71BR11 communication Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method A Nothing si noted method communication method differs Transmission Duplex loop Single bus method Single bus Encoding method p Modulatio thod NRZI codin peuauon metod Modulation method NRZI method E Encoding method Encoding method Nothing to be noted though the Manchester code 4 modulation method differs Transmi
351. y result in electric shock Startup and Maintenance Precautions Before performing online operations especially program modification forced output and operating status change for the running CPU module on another station from GX Developer over the MELSECNET H network read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Personal Handy phone System more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction MELSECNET H module with function version D or later be replaced online while power is on any remote station Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant section in the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote network Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause malfunction Tighten the module fixing screw and the terminal screw within the specified torque range Under
352. ystem in which parameters are set using GX Developer on the Q series This section explains the above using the following system configuration example Station No 4 Station No 9 Station No 2 Local Station No 8 station Intelligent Master Station No 1 station Remote Remote Occupies Reserved 1 device station X YOO to 1F station device station 4 stations station Occupies Occupies Occupies Occupies 4 stations 2 stations 1 station 1 station 8 8 1 Parameter setting example on the A AnS series The following shows a program example of parameter setting using the sequence program TO instruction XO XOF 0 AA 15 MO Module Module error ready MO H 5 1 4 MOV K5 DO Number of stations 5 stations MOV K5 01 Number of retries 5 times MOV K2 D2 Number of automatic return modules 2 modules 00 K3 Number of stations 5 stations MOV KO D3 Stop at CPU failure H6 D3 K1 Stop at CPU failure 46 MOV H80 D4 Reserved station specification Station No 8 TO HO H10 D4 K1 Reserved station specification Station No 8 8 25 9 REPLACEMENT CC LINK 012 1 Station No 1 setting 61 1202 013 Station No 2 setting 2404 014 1 Station No 4 setting

Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents